<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
<!DOCTYPE ThML PUBLIC 
    "-//CCEL/DTD Theological Markup Language//EN"
    "http://www.ccel.org/dtd/ThML10.dtd">
<!--
<?xml-stylesheet type="text/xml"
    href="http://www.ccel.org/ss/thml.html.xsl" ?>
<?xml-stylesheet type="text/xsl"
    href="http://www.ccel.org/ss/thml.html.xsl" ?>
-->
    
<!-- Copyright Christian Classics Ethereal Library -->
<ThML>
<ThML.head>

<generalInfo>
  <description>In <i>On Christian Doctrine</i>, St. Augustine 
helps readers discover, teach, and defend the truths of 
Scripture. According to St. Augustine, in order for 
Christians to fully understand Scripture, it should be 
interpreted with faith, hope, and love. St. Augustine 
helps readers recognize and interpret figurative 
expressions and ambiguous language. St. Augustine suggests that readers 
consult original translations and commit difficult terms to memory. He 
also suggests we familiarize ourselves with the meaning of frequently 
used symbols, such as "shepherd" and "sheep." For those who teach the 
Scripture to others, St. Augustine says we must teach in honesty--not 
for self-seeking purposes. This text offers an impressive wealth of 
practical wisdom for reading the Bible. It is evident that St. Augustine 
earnestly wanted his readers to understand God's Word.<br /><br />Emmalon 
Davis<br />CCEL Staff Writer </description>
  <pubHistory />
  <comments />
</generalInfo>

<printSourceInfo>
  <published />
</printSourceInfo>

<electronicEdInfo>
  <publisherID>ccel</publisherID>
  <authorID>augustine</authorID>
  <bookID>doctrine</bookID>
  <workID>doctrine</workID>
  <bkgID>on_christian_doctrine_in_four_books_(augustine)</bkgID>
  <version>1.0</version>
  <editorialComments />
  <revisionHistory />
  <status />

  <DC>
    <DC.Title>On Christian Doctrine, in Four Books</DC.Title>
    <DC.Creator sub="Author" scheme="short-form">Saint Augustine</DC.Creator>
    <DC.Creator sub="Author" scheme="file-as">Saint Augustine</DC.Creator>
     
    <DC.Publisher>Grand Rapids, MI: Christian Classics Ethereal Library</DC.Publisher>
    <DC.Subject scheme="LCCN">BR65. A655 E5</DC.Subject>
    <DC.Subject scheme="lcsh1">Christianity</DC.Subject>
    <DC.Subject scheme="lcsh2">Early Christian Literature. Fathers of the Church, etc.</DC.Subject>
    <DC.Subject scheme="ccel">All; Early Church; Theology; Classic</DC.Subject>
    <DC.Contributor sub="Digitizer" />
    <DC.Date sub="Created" />
    <DC.Type>Text.Monograph</DC.Type>
    <DC.Format scheme="IMT">text/html</DC.Format>
    <DC.Identifier scheme="URL">/ccel/augustine/doctrine.html</DC.Identifier>
    <DC.Identifier scheme="ISBN" />
    <DC.Source />
    <DC.Source scheme="URL" />
    <DC.Language scheme="ISO639-3">eng</DC.Language>
    <DC.Rights>Public Domain</DC.Rights>
  </DC>

</electronicEdInfo>





<style type="text/css">
.par	{ text-indent:0in; margin-top:6pt }
</style>

<style type="text/xcss">
<selector class="par">
  <property name="text-indent" value="0in" />
  <property name="margin-top" value="6pt" />
</selector>
</style>


</ThML.head>


<ThML.body>

<div1 title="Title Page" progress="0.12%" prev="toc" next="ii" id="i">
<h1 id="i-p0.1">ON CHRISTIAN DOCTRINE, IN FOUR BOOKS</h1>
<h3 id="i-p0.2">by St. Augustine</h3>
<p style="text-align:center" id="i-p1"><b>This etext is in the public domain.</b></p>
</div1>

<div1 type="prefatory" title="Introductory Note by the Editior" progress="0.14%" prev="i" next="iii" id="ii">
<h2 id="ii-p0.1">INTRODUCTORY NOTE BY THE EDITOR</h2>
<p class="Body" id="ii-p1">The four books of St. Augustine On Christian Doctrine (De Doctrina 
Christiana, iv libri) are a compend of exegetical theology to guide the reader 
in the understanding and interpretation of the Sacred Scriptures, according to 
the analogy of faith. The first three books were written A. D. 397; the fourth 
was added 426.</p>
<p class="Body" style="margin-top:6pt" id="ii-p2">He speaks of it in his Retractations, Bk.
2, chap. 4, as follows:</p>

<blockquote id="ii-p2.1"><p>"Finding that the books on Christian Doctrine were not finished, I 
thought it better to complete them before passing on to the revision of 
others. Accordingly, I completed the third book, which had been written as far 
as the place where a quotation is made from the Gospel about the woman who 
took leaven and hid it in three measures of meal till the whole was leavened.' 
I added also the last book, and finished the whole work in four books [in the 
year 426]: the first three affording aids to the interpretation of Scripture, 
the last giving directions as to the mode of making known our interpretation. 
In the second book, I made a mistake as to the authorship of the book commonly 
called the Wisdom of Solomon. For I have since learnt that it is not a 
well-established fact, as I said it was, that Jesus the son of Sirach, who 
wrote the book of Ecclesiasticus, wrote this book also: on the contrary, I 
have ascertained that it is altogether more probable that he was not the 
author of this book. Again, when I said, 'The authority of the Old Testament 
is contained within the limits of these forty-four books,' I used the phrase 
'Old Testament' in accordance with ecclesiastical usage. But the apostle seems 
to restrict the application of the name 'Old Testament' to the law which was 
given on Mount Sinai. And in what I said as to St. Ambrose having, by his 
knowledge of chronology, solved a great difficulty, when he showed that Plato 
and Jeremiah were contemporaries, my memory betrayed me. What that great 
bishop really did say upon this subject may be seen in the book which he 
wrote, 'On Sacraments or Philosophy.'"</p></blockquote>
</div1>

<div1 type="Preface" title="Contents of Christian Doctrine" progress="0.69%" prev="ii" next="iv" id="iii">
<h2 id="iii-p0.1">CONTENTS OF CHRISTIAN DOCTRINE</h2>
<h3 id="iii-p0.2"><i>Preface, showing the utility of the treatise on Christian doctrine</i></h3>


<h2 id="iii-p0.3">BOOK I. Containing a general view of the subjects treated in Holy Scripture.</h2>

<p class="Body" id="iii-p1">The author divides his work into two parts, one relating to the discovery, 
the other to the expression, of the true sense of Scripture. He shows that to 
discover the meaning we must attend both to things and to signs, as it is 
necessary to know what things we ought to teach to the Christian people, and 
also the signs of these things, that is, where the knowledge of these things is 
to be sought. In this first book he treats of things, which he divides into 
three classes,—things to be enjoyed, things to be used, and things which use 
and enjoy. The only object which ought to be enjoyed is the Triune God, who is 
our highest good and our true happiness. We are prevented by our sins from 
enjoying God; and that our sins might be taken away, "The Word was made Flesh," 
our Lord suffered, and died, and rose again, and ascended into heaven, taking to 
Himself as his bride the Church, in which we receive remission of our sins. And 
if our sins are remitted and our souls renewed by grace, we may await with hope 
the resurrection of the body to eternal glory; if not, we shall be raised to 
everlasting punishment. These matters relating to faith having been expounded, 
the author goes on to show that all objects, except God, are for use; for, 
though some of them may be loved, yet our love is not to rest in them, but to 
have reference to God. And we ourselves are not objects of enjoyment to God: he 
uses us, but for our own advantage. He then goes on to show that love—the love 
of God for His own sake and the love of our neighbour for God's sake—is the 
fulfilment and the end of all Scripture. After adding a few words about hope, he 
shows, in conclusion, that faith, hope, and love are graces essentially 
necessary for him who would understand and explain aright the Holy Scriptures.</p>

<h2 id="iii-p1.1">BOOK II.</h2>
<p class="Body" id="iii-p2">Having completed his exposition of things, the author now proceeds to discuss 
the subject of signs. He first defines what a sign is, and shows that there are 
two classes of signs, the natural and the conventional. Of conventional signs 
(which are the only class here noticed), words are the most numerous and 
important, and are those with which the interpreter of Scripture is chiefly 
concerned. The difficulties and obscurities of Scripture spring chiefly from two 
sources, unknown and ambiguous signs. The present book deals only with unknown 
signs, the ambiguities of language being reserved for treatment in the next 
book. The difficulty arising from ignorance of signs is to be removed by 
learning the Greek and Hebrew languages, in which Scripture is written, by 
comparing the various translations, and by attending to the context. In the 
interpretation of figurative expressions, knowledge of things is as necessary as 
knowledge of words; and the various sciences and arts of the heathen, so far as 
they are true and useful, may be turned to account in removing our ignorance of 
signs, whether these be direct or figurative. Whilst exposing the folly and 
futility of many heathen superstitions and practices, the author points out how 
all that is sound and useful in their science and philosophy may be turned to a 
Christian use. And in conclusion, he shows the spirit in which it behoves us to 
address ourselves to the study and interpretation of the sacred books.</p>

<h2 id="iii-p2.1">BOOK III.</h2>
<p class="Body" id="iii-p3">The author, having discussed in the preceding book the method of dealing with 
unknown signs, goes on in this third book to treat of ambiguous signs. Such 
signs may be either direct or figurative. In the case of direct signs ambiguity 
may arise from the punctuation, the pronunciation, or the doubtful signification 
of the words, and is to be resolved by attention to the context, a comparison of 
translations, or a reference to the original tongue. In the case of figurative 
signs we need to guard against two mistakes:—1. the interpreting literal 
expressions figuratively; 2. the interpreting figurative expressions literally. 
The author lays down rules by which we may decide whether an expression is 
literal or figurative; the general rule being, that whatever can be shown to be 
in its literal sense inconsistent either with purity of life or correctness of 
doctrine must be taken figuratively. He then goes on to lay down rules for the 
interpretation of expressions which have been proved to be figurative; the 
general principle being, that no interpretation can be true which does not 
promote the love of God and the love of man. The author then proceeds to expound 
and illustrate the seven rules of Tichonius the Donatist, which he commends to 
the attention of the student of Holy Scripture.</p>

<h2 id="iii-p3.1">BOOK IV.</h2>
<p class="Body" id="iii-p4">Passing to the second part of his work, that which treats of expression, the 
author premises that it is no part of his intention to write a treatise on the 
laws of rhetoric. These can be learned elsewhere, and ought not to be neglected, 
being indeed specially necessary for the Christian teacher, whom it behoves to 
excel in eloquence and power of speech. After detailing with much care and 
minuteness the various qualities of an orator, he recommends the authors of the 
Holy Scriptures as the best models of eloquence, far excelling all others in the 
combination of eloquence with wisdom. He points out that perspicuity is the most 
essential quality of style, and ought to be cultivated with especial care by the 
teacher, as it is the main requisite for instruction, although other qualities 
are required for delighting and persuading the hearer. All these gifts are to be 
sought in earnest prayer from God, though we are not to forget to be zealous and 
diligent in study. He shows that there are three species of style,—the subdued, 
the elegant, and the majestic; the first serving for instruction, the second for 
praise, and the third for exhortation: and of each of these he gives examples, 
selected both from Scripture and from early teachers of the Church, Cyprian and 
Ambrose. He shows that these various styles may be mingled, and when and for 
what purposes they are mingled; and that they all have the same end in view, to 
bring home the truth to the hearer, so that he may understand it, hear it with 
gladness, and practice it in his life. Finally, he exhorts the Christian teacher 
himself, pointing out the dignity and responsibility of the office he holds, to 
lead a life in harmony with his own teaching, and to show a good example to all.</p> 
</div1>

<div1 type="section" title="On Christian Doctrine" progress="2.41%" prev="iii" next="iv.i" id="iv">

<h1 id="iv-p0.1">ON CHRISTIAN DOCTRINE</h1>

<div2 type="chapter" title="Preface" progress="2.42%" prev="iv" next="iv.ii" id="iv.i">

<h2 id="iv.i-p0.1">Preface</h2>
<p class="Body" id="iv.i-p1"><i>Showing that to teach rules for the interpretation of Scripture is not a 
superfluous task</i></p>

<p class="par" id="iv.i-p2">1. There are certain rules for the interpretation of Scripture which I think 
might with great advantage be taught to earnest students of the word, that 
they may profit not only from reading the works of others who have laid open 
the secrets of the sacred writings, but also from themselves opening such 
secrets to others. These rules I propose to teach to those who are able and 
willing to learn, if God our Lord do not withhold from me, while I write, the 
thoughts He is wont to vouchsafe to me in my meditations on this subject. But 
before I enter upon this undertaking, I think it well to meet the objections 
of those who are likely to take exception to the work, or who would do so, did 
I not conciliate them beforehand. And if, after all, men should still be found 
to make objections, yet at least they will not prevail with others (over whom 
they might have influence, did they not find them forearmed against their 
assaults), to turn them back from a useful study to the dull sloth of 
ignorance.</p>

<p class="par" id="iv.i-p3">2. There are some, then, likely to object to this work of mine, because they 
have failed to understand the rules here laid down. Others, again, will think 
that I have spent my labour to no purpose, because, though they understand the 
rules, yet in their attempts to apply them and to interpret Scripture by them, 
they have failed to clear up the point they wish cleared up; and these, 
because they have received no assistance from this work themselves, will give 
it as their opinion that it can be of no use to anybody. There is a third 
class of objectors who either really do understand Scripture well, or think 
they do, and who, because they know (or imagine) that they have attained a 
certain power of interpreting the sacred books without reading any directions 
of the kind that I propose to lay down here, will cry out that such rules are 
not necessary for any one, but that everything rightly done towards clearing 
up the obscurities of Scripture could be better done by the unassisted grace 
of God.</p>

<p class="par" id="iv.i-p4">3. To reply briefly to all these. To those who do not understand what is here 
set down, my answer is, that I am not to be blamed for their want of 
understanding. It is just as if they were anxious to see the new or the old 
moon, or some very obscure star, and I should point it out with my finger: if 
they had not sight enough to see even my finger, they would surely have no 
right to fly into a passion with me on that account. As for those who, even 
though they know and understand my directions, fail to penetrate the meaning 
of obscure passages in Scripture, they may stand for those who, in the case I 
have imagined, are just able to see my finger, but cannot see the stars at 
which it is pointed. And so both these classes had better give up blaming me, 
and pray instead that God would grant them the sight of their eyes. For though 
I can move my finger to point out an object, it is out of my power to open 
men's eyes that they may see either the fact that I am pointing, or the object 
at which I point.</p>

<p class="par" id="iv.i-p5">4. But now as to those who talk vauntingly of Divine Grace, and boast that 
they understand and can explain Scripture without the aid of such directions 
as those I now propose to lay down, and who think, therefore, that what I have 
undertaken to write is entirely superfluous. I would such persons could calm 
themselves so far as to remember that, however justly they may rejoice in 
God's great gift, yet it was from human teachers they themselves learnt to 
read. Now, they would hardly think it right that they should for that reason 
be held in contempt by the Egyptian monk Antony, a just and holy man, who, not 
being able to read himself, is said to have committed the Scriptures to memory 
through hearing them read by others, and by dint of wise meditation to have 
arrived at a thorough understanding of them; or by that barbarian slave 
Christianus, of whom I have lately heard from very respectable and trustworthy 
witnesses, who, without any teaching from man, attained a full knowledge of 
the art of reading simply through prayer that it might be revealed to him; 
after three days' supplication obtaining his request that he might read 
through a book presented to him on the spot by the astonished bystanders.</p>

<p class="par" id="iv.i-p6">5. But if any one thinks that these stories are false, I do not strongly 
insist on them. For, as I am dealing with Christians who profess to understand 
the Scriptures without any directions from man (and if the fact be so, they 
boast of a real advantage, and one of no ordinary kind), they must surely 
grant that every one of us learnt his own language by hearing it constantly 
from childhood, and that any other language we have learnt,—Greek, or Hebrew, 
or any of the rest,—we have learnt either in the same way, by hearing it 
spoken, or from a human teacher. Now, then, suppose we advise all our brethren 
not to teach their children any of these things, because on the outpouring of 
the Holy Spirit the apostles immediately began to speak the language of every 
race; and warn every one who has not had a like experience that he need not 
consider himself a Christian, or may at least doubt whether he has yet 
received the Holy Spirit? No, no; rather let us put away false pride and learn 
whatever can be learnt from man; and let him who teaches another communicate 
what he has himself received without arrogance and without jealousy. And do 
not let us tempt Him in whom we have believed, lest, being ensnared by such 
wiles of the enemy and by our own perversity, we may even refuse to go to the 
churches to hear the gospel itself, or to read a book, or to listen to another 
reading or preaching, in the hope that we shall be carried up to the third 
heaven, "whether in the body or out of the body," as the apostle says, and 
there hear unspeakable words, such as it is not lawful for man to utter, or 
see the Lord Jesus Christ and hear the gospel from His own lips rather than 
from those of men.</p>

<p class="par" id="iv.i-p7">6. Let us beware of such dangerous temptations of pride, and let us rather 
consider the fact that the Apostle Paul himself, although stricken down and 
admonished by the voice of God from heaven, was yet sent to a man to receive 
the sacraments and be admitted into the Church; and that Cornelius the 
centurion, although an angel announced to him that his prayers were heard and 
his alms had in remembrance, was yet handed over to Peter for instruction, and 
not only received the sacraments from the apostle's hands, but was also 
instructed by him as to the proper objects of faith, hope, and love. And 
without doubt it was possible to have done everything through the 
instrumentality of angels, but the condition of our race would have been much 
more degraded if God had not chosen to make use of men as the ministers of His 
word to their fellow-men. For how could that be true which is written, "The 
temple of God is holy, which temple ye are," if God gave forth no oracles from 
His human temple, but communicated everything that He wished to be taught to 
men by voices from heaven, or through the ministration of angels? Moreover, 
love itself, which binds men together in the bond of unity, would have no 
means of pouring soul into soul, and, as it were, mingling them one with 
another, if men never learnt anything from their fellow-men.</p>

<p class="par" id="iv.i-p8">7. And we know that the eunuch who was reading Isaiah the prophet, and did 
not understand what he read, was not sent by the apostle to an angel, nor was 
it an angel who explained to him what he did not understand, nor was he 
inwardly illuminated by the grace of God without the interposition of man; on 
the contrary, at the suggestion of God, Philip, who did understand the 
prophet, came to him, and sat with him, and in human words, and with a human 
tongue, opened to him the Scriptures. Did not God talk with Moses, and yet he, 
with great wisdom and entire absence of jealous pride, accepted the plan of 
his father-in-law, a man of an alien race, for ruling and administering the 
affairs of the great nation entrusted to him? For Moses knew that a wise plan, 
in whatever mind it might originate, was to be ascribed not to the man who 
devised it, but to Him who is the Truth, the unchangeable God.</p>

<p class="par" id="iv.i-p9">8. In the last place, every one who boasts that he, through divine 
illumination, understands the obscurities of Scripture, though not instructed 
in any rules of interpretation, at the same time believes, and rightly 
believes, that this power is not his own, in the sense of originating with 
himself, but is the gift of God. For so he seeks God's glory, not his own. But 
reading and understanding, as he does, without the aid of any human 
interpreter, why does he himself undertake to interpret for others? Why does 
he not rather send them direct to God, that they too may learn by the inward 
teaching of the Spirit without the help of man? The truth is, he fears to 
incur the reproach: "Thou wicked and slothful servant, thou oughtest to have 
put my money to the exchangers." Seeing, then, that these men teach others, 
either through speech or writing, what they understand, surely they cannot 
blame me if I likewise teach not only what they understand, but also the rules 
of interpretation they follow. For no one ought to consider anything as his 
own, except perhaps what is false. All truth is of Him who says, "I am the 
truth." For what have we that we did not receive? And if we have received it, 
why do we glory, as if we had not received it?</p>

<p class="par" id="iv.i-p10">9. He who reads to an audience pronounces aloud the words he sees before him: 
he who teaches reading, does it that others may be able to read for 
themselves. Each, however, communicates to others what he has learnt himself. 
Just so, the man who explains to an audience the passages of Scripture he 
understands is like one who reads aloud the words before him. On the other 
hand, the man who lays down rules for interpretation is like one who teaches 
reading, that is, shows others how to read for themselves. So that, just as he 
who knows how to read is not dependent on some one else, when he finds a book, 
to tell him what is written in it, so the man who is in possession of the 
rules which I here attempt to lay down, if he meet with an obscure passage in 
the books which he reads, will not need an interpreter to lay open the secret 
to him, but, holding fast by certain rules, and following up certain 
indications, will arrive at the hidden sense without any error, or at least 
without falling into any gross absurdity. And so although it will sufficiently 
appear in the course of the work itself that no one can justly object to this 
undertaking of mine, which has no other object than to be of service, yet as 
it seemed convenient to reply at the outset to any who might make preliminary 
objections, such is the start I have thought good to make on the road I am 
about to traverse in this book.</p>

</div2>

<div2 type="book" title="Book I. Containing a General View of the Subjects Treated in Holy Scripture" progress="5.31%" prev="iv.i" next="iv.ii.i" id="iv.ii">

<h2 id="iv.ii-p0.1">BOOK I.</h2>
<p style="text-align:center" id="iv.ii-p1">Containing a General View of the Subjects Treated in Holy Scripture</p>

<h3 id="iv.ii-p1.1">Argument</h3>
<p class="Body" id="iv.ii-p2"><i>The author divides his work into two parts, one relating to the 
discovery, the other to the expression, of the true sense of Scripture. He 
shows that to discover the meaning we must attend both to things and to signs, 
as it is necessary to know what things we ought to teach to the Christian 
people, and also the signs of these things, that is, where the knowledge of 
these things is to be sought. In this first book he treats of things, which he 
divides into three classes,—things to be enjoyed, things to be used, and 
things which use and enjoy. The only object which ought to be enjoyed is the 
Triune God, who is our highest good and our true happiness. We are prevented 
by our sins from enjoying God; and that our sins might be taken away, "The 
Word was made Flesh," our Lord suffered, and died, and rose again, and 
ascended into heaven, taking to Himself as his bride the Church, in which we 
receive remission of our sins. And if our sins are remitted and our souls 
renewed by grace, we may await with hope the resurrection of the body to 
eternal glory; if not, we shall be raised to everlasting punishment. These 
matters relating to faith having been expounded, the author goes on to show 
that all objects, except God, are for use; for, though some of them may be 
loved, yet our love is not to rest in them, but to have reference to God. And 
we ourselves are not objects of enjoyment to God: he uses us, but for our own 
advantage. He then goes on to show that love—the love of God for His own sake 
and the love of our neighbour for God's sake—is the fulfilment and the end of 
all Scripture. After adding a few words about hope, he shows, in conclusion, 
that faith, hope, and love are graces essentially necessary for him who would 
understand and explain aright the Holy Scriptures. </i></p>

<div3 title="Chap. 1. The interpretation of Scripture depends on the discovery and enunciation of the meaning, and is to be undertaken in dependence on God's aid." prev="iv.ii" next="iv.ii.ii" id="iv.ii.i">

<h3 id="iv.ii.i-p0.1">Chapter 1</h3>
<p class="par" id="iv.ii.i-p1">1. There are two things on which all interpretation of Scripture depends: the 
mode of ascertaining the proper meaning, and the mode of making known the 
meaning when it is ascertained. We shall treat first of the mode of 
ascertaining, next of the mode of making known, the meaning;—a great and 
arduous undertaking, and one that, if difficult to carry out, it is, I fear, 
presumptuous to enter upon. And presumptuous it would undoubtedly be, if I 
were counting on my own strength; but since my hope of accomplishing the work 
rests on Him who has already supplied me with many thoughts on this subject, I 
do not fear but that He will go on to supply what is yet wanting when once I 
have begun to use what He has already given. For a possession which is not 
diminished by being shared with others, if it is possessed and not shared, is 
not yet possessed as it ought to be possessed. The Lord saith, "Whosoever has, 
to him shall be given." He will give, then, to those who have; that is to 
say, if they use freely and cheerfully what they have received, He will add to 
and perfect His gifts. The loaves in the miracle were only five and seven in 
number before the disciples began to divide them among the hungry people. But 
when once they began to distribute them, though the wants of so many thousands 
were satisfied, they filled baskets with the fragments that were left. Now, 
just as that bread increased in the very act of breaking it, so those thoughts 
which the Lord has already vouchsafed to me with a view to undertaking this 
work will, as soon as I begin to impart them to others, be multiplied by His 
grace, so that, in this very work of distribution in which I have engaged, so 
far from incurring loss and poverty, I shall be made to rejoice in a 
marvellous increase of wealth.</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 2. What a thing is, and what a sign" prev="iv.ii.i" next="iv.ii.iii" id="iv.ii.ii">
<h3 id="iv.ii.ii-p0.1">Chapter 2</h3>

<p class="par" id="iv.ii.ii-p1">2. All instruction is either about things or about signs; but things are 
learnt by means of signs. I now use the word "thing" in a strict sense, to 
signify that which is never employed as a sign of anything else: for example, 
wood, stone, cattle, and other things of that kind. Not, however, the wood 
which we read Moses cast into the bitter waters to make them sweet, nor the 
stone which Jacob used as a pillow, nor the ram which Abraham offered up 
instead of his son; for these, though they are things, are also signs of other 
things. There are signs of another kind, those which are never employed except 
as signs: for example, words. No one uses words except as signs of something 
else; and hence may be understood what I call signs: those things, to wit, 
which are used to indicate something else. Accordingly, every sign is also a 
thing; for what is not a thing is nothing at all. Every thing, however, is not 
also a sign. And so, in regard to this distinction between things and signs, I 
shall, when I speak of things, speak in such a way that even if some of them 
may be used as signs also, that will not interfere with the division of the 
subject according to which I am to discuss things first and signs afterwards. 
But we must carefully remember that what we have now to consider about things 
is what they are in themselves, not what other things they are signs of.</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 3. Some things are for use, some for enjoyment" prev="iv.ii.ii" next="iv.ii.iv" id="iv.ii.iii">
<h3 id="iv.ii.iii-p0.1">Chapter 3</h3>

<p class="par" id="iv.ii.iii-p1">3. There are some things, then, which are to be enjoyed, others which are to 
be used, others still which enjoy and use. Those things which are objects of 
enjoyment make us happy. Those things which are objects of use assist, and (so 
to speak) support us in our efforts after happiness, so that we can attain the 
things that make us happy and rest in them. We ourselves, again, who enjoy and 
use these things, being placed among both kinds of objects, if we set 
ourselves to enjoy those which we ought to use, are hindered in our course, 
and sometimes even led away from it; so that, getting entangled in the love of 
lower gratifications, we lag behind in, or even altogether turn back from, the 
pursuit of the real and proper objects of enjoyment.</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 4. Difference of use and enjoyment" prev="iv.ii.iii" next="v" id="iv.ii.iv">
<h3 id="iv.ii.iv-p0.1">Chapter 4</h3>

<p class="par" id="iv.ii.iv-p1">4. For to enjoy a thing is to rest with satisfaction in it for its own sake. 
To use, on the other hand, is to employ whatever means are at one's disposal 
to obtain what one desires, if it is a proper object of desire; for an 
unlawful use ought rather to be called an abuse. Suppose, then, we were 
wanderers in a strange country, and could not live happily away from our 
fatherland, and that we felt wretched in our wandering, and wishing to put an 
end to our misery, determined to return home. We find, however, that we must 
make use of some mode of conveyance, either by land or water, in order to 
reach that fatherland where our enjoyment is to commence. But the beauty of 
the country through which we pass, and the very pleasure of the motion, charm 
our hearts, and turning these things which we ought to use into objects of 
enjoyment, we become unwilling to hasten the end of our journey; and becoming 
engrossed in a factitious delight, our thoughts are diverted from that home 
whose delights would make us truly happy. Such is a picture of our condition 
in this life of mortality. We have wandered far from God; and if we wish to 
return to our Father's home, this world must be used, not enjoyed, that so the 
invisible things of God may be clearly seen, being understood by the things 
that are made,—that is, that by means of what is material and temporary we 
may lay hold upon that which is spiritual and eternal.</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 5. The Trinity the true object of enjoyment" prev="iv.ii.iv" next="vi" id="v">

<h3 id="v-p0.1">Chapter 5</h3>
<p class="par" id="v-p1">5. The true objects of enjoyment, then, are the Father and the Son and the 
Holy Spirit, who are at the same time the Trinity, one Being, supreme above 
all, and common to all who enjoy Him, if He is an object, and not rather the 
cause of all objects, or indeed even if He is the cause of all. For it is not 
easy to find a name that will suitably express so great excellence, unless it 
is better to speak in this way: The Trinity, one God, of whom are all things, 
through whom are all things, in whom are all things. Thus the Father and the 
Son and the Holy Spirit, and each of these by Himself, is God, and at the same 
time they are all one God; and each of them by Himself is a complete 
substance, and yet they are all one substance. The Father is not the Son nor 
the Holy Spirit; the Son is not the Father nor the Holy Spirit; the Holy 
Spirit is not the Father nor the Son: but the Father is only Father, the Son 
is only Son, and the Holy Spirit is only Holy Spirit. To all three belong the 
same eternity, the same unchangeableness, the same majesty, the same power. In 
the Father is unity, in the Son equality, in the Holy Spirit the harmony of 
unity and equality; and these three attributes are all one because of the 
Father, all equal because of the Son, and all harmonious because of the Holy 
Spirit.</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 6. In what sense God is ineffable" prev="v" next="vii" id="vi">

<h3 id="vi-p0.1">Chapter 6</h3>
<p class="par" id="vi-p1">6. Have I spoken of God, or uttered His praise, in any worthy way? Nay, I 
feel that I have done nothing more than desire to speak; and if I have said 
anything, it is not what I desired to say. How do I know this, except from the 
fact that God is unspeakable? But what I have said, if it had been 
unspeakable, could not have been spoken. And so God is not even to be called 
"unspeakable," because to say even this is to speak of Him. Thus there arises 
a curious contradiction of words, because if the unspeakable is what cannot be 
spoken of, it is not unspeakable if it can be called unspeakable. And this 
opposition of words is rather to be avoided by silence than to be explained 
away by speech. And yet God, although nothing worthy of His greatness can be 
said of Him, has condescended to accept the worship of men's mouths, and has 
desired us through the medium of our own words to rejoice in His praise. For 
on this principle it is that He is called <span lang="LA" id="vi-p1.1">Deus</span> (God). For the sound of those 
two syllables in itself conveys no true knowledge of His nature; but yet all 
who know the Latin tongue are led, when that sound reaches their ears, to 
think of a nature supreme in excellence and eternal in existence.</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 7. What all men understand by the term God" prev="vi" next="viii" id="vii">

<h3 id="vii-p0.1">Chapter 7</h3>
<p class="par" id="vii-p1">7. For when the one supreme God of gods is thought of, even by those who 
believe that there are other gods, and who call them by that name, and worship 
them as gods, their thought takes the form of an endeavour to reach the 
conception of a nature, than which nothing more excellent or more exalted 
exists. And since men are moved by different kinds of pleasures, partly by 
those which pertain to the bodily senses, partly by those which pertain to the 
intellect and soul, those of them who are in bondage to sense think that 
either the heavens, or what appears to be most brilliant in the heavens, or 
the universe itself, is God of gods: or if they try to get beyond the 
universe, they picture to themselves something of dazzling brightness, and 
think of it vaguely as infinite, or of the most beautiful form conceivable; or 
they represent it in the form of the human body, if they think that superior 
to all others. Or if they think that there is no one God supreme above the 
rest, but that there are many or even innumerable gods of equal rank, still 
these too they conceive as possessed of shape and form, according to what each 
man thinks the pattern of excellence. Those, on the other hand, who endeavour 
by an effort of the intelligence to reach a conception of God, place Him above 
all visible and bodily natures, and even above all intelligent and spiritual 
natures that are subject to change. All, however, strive emulously to exalt 
the excellence of God: nor could any one be found to believe that any being to 
whom there exists a superior is God. And so all concur in believing that God 
is that which excels in dignity all other objects.</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 8. God to be esteemed above all else because He is unchangeable Wisdom" prev="vii" next="ix" id="viii">

<h3 id="viii-p0.1">Chapter 8</h3>
<p class="par" id="viii-p1">8. And since all who think about God think of Him as living, they only can 
form any conception of Him that is not absurd and unworthy who think of Him as 
life itself; and, whatever may be the bodily form that has suggested itself to 
them, recognize that it is by life it lives or does not live, and prefer what 
is living to what is dead; who understand that the living bodily form itself, 
however it may outshine all others in splendour, overtop them in size, and 
excel them in beauty, is quite a distinct thing from the life by which it is 
quickened; and who look upon the life as incomparably superior in dignity and 
worth to the mass which is quickened and animated by it. Then, when they go on 
to look into the nature of the life itself, if they find it mere nutritive 
life, without sensibility, such as that of plants, they consider it inferior 
to sentient life, such as that of cattle; and above this, again, they place 
intelligent life, such as that of men. And, perceiving that even this is 
subject to change, they are compelled to place above it, again, that 
unchangeable life, which is not at one time foolish, at another time wise, but 
on the contrary is wisdom itself. For a wise intelligence, that is, one that 
has attained to wisdom, was, previous to its attaining wisdom, unwise. But 
wisdom itself never was unwise, and never can become so. And if men never 
caught sight of this wisdom, they could never with entire confidence prefer a 
life which is unchangeably wise to one that is subject to change. This will be 
evident, if we consider that the very rule of truth by which they affirm the 
unchangeable life to be the more excellent, is itself unchangeable: and they 
cannot find such a rule, except by going beyond their own nature; for they 
find nothing in themselves that is not subject to change.</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 9. All acknowledge the superiority of unchangeable: wisdom to that which is variable" prev="viii" next="x" id="ix">

<h3 id="ix-p0.1">Chapter 9</h3>
<p class="par" id="ix-p1">9. Now, no one is so egregiously silly as to ask, "How do you know that a 
life of unchangeable wisdom is preferable to one of change?" For that very 
truth about which he asks, how I know it? is unchangeably fixed in the minds 
of all men, and presented to their common contemplation. And the man who does 
not see it is like a blind man in the sun, whom it profits nothing that the 
splendour of its light, so clear and so near, is poured into his very 
eyeballs. The man, on the other hand, who sees, but shrinks from this truth, 
is weak in his mental vision from dwelling long among the shadows of the 
flesh. And thus men are driven back from their native land by the contrary 
blasts of evil habits, and pursue lower and less valuable objects in 
preference to that which they own to be more excellent and more worthy.</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 10. To see God, the soul must be purified" prev="ix" next="xi" id="x">

<h3 id="x-p0.1">Chapter 10</h3>
<p class="par" id="x-p1">10. Wherefore, since it is our duty fully to enjoy the truth which lives 
unchangeably, and truth for the things which He has made, the soul must be 
purified that it may have power to perceive that light, and to rest in it when 
it is perceived. And let us look upon this purification as a kind of journey 
or voyage to our native land. For it is not by change of place that we can 
come nearer to Him who is in every place, but by the cultivation of pure 
desires and virtuous habits.</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 11. Wisdom becoming incarnate, a pattern to us of purification" prev="x" next="xii" id="xi">

<h3 id="xi-p0.1">Chapter 11</h3>
<p class="par" id="xi-p1">11. But of this we should have been wholly incapable, had not Wisdom 
condescended to adapt Himself to our weakness, and to show us a pattern of 
holy life in the form of our own humanity. Yet, since we when we come to Him 
do wisely, He when He came to us was considered by proud men to have done very 
foolishly. And since we when we come to Him become strong, He when He came to 
us was looked upon as weak. But "the foolishness of God is wiser than men; and 
the weakness of God is stronger than men." And thus, though Wisdom was Himself 
our home, He made Himself also the way by which we should reach our home.</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 12. In what sense the Wisdom of God came to us" prev="xi" next="xiii" id="xii">
<h3 id="xii-p0.1">Chapter 12</h3>
<p class="Body" id="xii-p1">And though He is everywhere present to the inner eye when it is sound and 
clear, He condescended to make Himself manifest to the outward eye of those 
whose inward sight is weak and dim. "For after that, in the wisdom of God, the 
world by wisdom knew not God, it pleased God by the foolishness of preaching 
to save them that believe."</p>

<p class="par" id="xii-p2">12. Not then in the sense of traversing space, but because He appeared to 
mortal men in the form of mortal flesh, He is said to have come to us. For He 
came to a place where He had always been, seeing that "He was in the world, 
and the world was made by Him." But, because men, who in their eagerness to 
enjoy the creature instead of the Creator had grown into the likeness of this 
world, and are therefore most appropriately named "the world," did not 
recognize Him, therefore the evangelist says, "and the world knew Him not." 
Thus, in the wisdom of God, the world by wisdom knew not God. Why then did He 
come, seeing that He was already here, except that it pleased God through the 
foolishness of preaching to save them that believe?</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 13. The Word was made flesh" prev="xii" next="xiv" id="xiii">
<h3 id="xiii-p0.1">Chapter 13</h3>
<p class="Body" id="xiii-p1">In what way did He come but this, "The Word was made flesh, and dwelt among 
us"? Just as when we speak, in order that what we leave in our minds may enter 
through the ear into the mind of the hearer, the word which we have in our 
hearts becomes an outward sound and is called speech; and yet our thought does 
not lose itself in the sound, but remains complete in itself, and takes the 
form of speech without being modified in its own nature by the change: so the 
Divine Word, though suffering no change of nature, yet became flesh, that He 
might dwell among us.</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 14. How the wisdom of God healed man" prev="xiii" next="xv" id="xiv">

<h3 id="xiv-p0.1">Chapter 14</h3>
<p class="par" id="xiv-p1">13. Moreover, as the use of remedies is the way to health, so this remedy took 
up sinners to heal and restore them. And just as surgeons, when they bind up 
wounds, do it not in a slovenly way, but carefully, that there may be a 
certain degree of neatness in the binding, in addition to its mere usefulness, 
so our medicine, Wisdom, was by His assumption of humanity adapted to our 
wounds, curing some of them by their opposites, some of them by their likes. 
And just as he who ministers to a bodily hurt in some cases applies 
contraries, as cold to hot, moist to dry, etc., and in other cases applies 
likes, as a round cloth to a round wound, or an oblong cloth to an oblong 
wound, and does not fit the same bandage to all limbs, but puts like to like; 
in the same way the Wisdom of God in healing man has applied Himself to his 
cure, being Himself healer and medicine both in one. Seeing, then, that man 
fell through pride, He restored him through humility. We were ensnared by the 
wisdom of the serpent: we are set free by the foolishness of God. Moreover, 
just as the former was called wisdom, but was in reality the folly of those 
who despised God, so the latter is called foolishness, but is true wisdom in 
those who overcome the devil. We used our immortality so badly as to incur the 
penalty of death: Christ used His mortality so well as to restore us to life. 
The disease was brought in through a woman's corrupted soul: the remedy came 
through a woman's virgin body. To the same class of opposite remedies it 
belongs, that our vices are cured by the example of His virtues. On the other 
hand, the following are, as it were, bandages made in the same shape as the 
limbs and wounds to which they are applied: He was born of a woman to deliver 
us who fell through a woman: He came as a man to save us who are men, as a 
mortal to save us who are mortals, by death to save us who were dead. And 
those who can follow out the matter more fully, who are not hurried on by the 
necessity of carrying out a set undertaking, will find many other points of 
instruction in considering the remedies, whether opposites or likes, employed 
in the medicine of Christianity.</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 15. Faith is buttressed by the resurrection and ascension of Christ, and is stimulated by His coming to judgment" prev="xiv" next="xvi" id="xv">

<h3 id="xv-p0.1">Chapter 15</h3><p class="par" id="xv-p1">14. The belief of the resurrection of our Lord from the dead, and of His 
ascension into heaven, has strengthened our faith by adding a great buttress 
of hope. For it clearly shows how freely He laid down His life for us when He 
had it in His power thus to take it up again. With what assurance, then, is 
the hope of believers animated, when they reflect how great He was who 
suffered so great things for them while they were still in unbelief! And when 
men look for Him to come from heaven as the judge of quick and dead, it 
strikes great terror into the careless, so that they retake themselves to 
diligent preparation, and learn by holy living to long for His approach, 
instead of quaking at it on account of their evil deeds. And what tongue can 
tell, or what imagination can conceive, the reward He will bestow at the last, 
when we consider that for our comfort in this earthly journey He has given us 
so freely of His Spirit, that in the adversities of this life we may retain 
our confidence in, and love for, Him whom as yet we see not; and that He has 
also given to each gifts suitable for the building up of His Church, that we 
may do what He points out as right to be done, not only without a murmur, but 
even with delight?</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 16. Christ purges His church by medicinal afflictions" prev="xv" next="xvii" id="xvi">

<h3 id="xvi-p0.1">Chapter 16</h3><p class="par" id="xvi-p1">15. For the Church is His body, as the apostle's teaching shows us; and it is 
even called His spouse. His body, then, which has many members, and all 
performing different functions, He holds together in the bond of unity and 
love, which is its true health. Moreover He exercises it in the present time, 
and purges it with many wholesome afflictions, that when He has transplanted 
it from this world to the eternal world, He may take it to Himself as His 
bride, without spot or wrinkle, or any such thing.</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 17. Christ, by forgiving our sins, opened the way to our home" prev="xvi" next="xviii" id="xvii">

<h3 id="xvii-p0.1">Chapter 17</h3><p class="par" id="xvii-p1">16. Further, when we are on the way, and that not a way that lies through 
space, but through a change of affections, and one which the guilt of our past 
sins like a hedge of thorns barred against us, what could He, who was willing 
to lay Himself down as the way by which we should return, do that would be 
still gracious and more merciful, except to forgive us all our sins, and by 
being crucified for us to remove the stern decrees that barred the door 
against our return?</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 18. The keys given to the Church" prev="xvii" next="xix" id="xviii">

<h3 id="xviii-p0.1">Chapter 18</h3><p class="par" id="xviii-p1">17. He has given, therefore, the keys to His Church, that whatsoever it should 
bind on earth might be bound in heaven, and whatsoever it should loose on 
earth might be loosed in heaven; that is to say, that whosoever in the Church 
should not believe that his sins are remitted, they should not be remitted to 
him; but that whosoever should believe, and should repent, and turn from his 
sins, should be saved by the same faith and repentance on the ground of which 
he is received into the bosom of the Church. For he who does not believe that 
his sins can be pardoned, falls into despair, and becomes worse, as if no 
greater good remained for him than to be evil, when he has ceased to have 
faith in the results of his own repentance.</p>
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 19. Bodily and spiritual death and resurrection" prev="xviii" next="xx" id="xix">

<h3 id="xix-p0.1">Chapter 19</h3><p class="par" id="xix-p1">18. Furthermore, as there is a kind of death of the soul, which consists in 
the putting away of former habits and former ways of life, and which comes 
through repentance, so also the death of the body consists in the dissolution 
of the former principle of life. And just as the soul, after it has put away 
and destroyed by repentance its former habits, is created anew after a better 
pattern, so we must hope and believe that the body, after that death which we 
all owe as a debt contracted through sin, shall at the resurrection be changed 
into a better form;—not that flesh and blood shall inherit the kingdom of God 
(for that is impossible), but that this corruptible shall put on incorruption, 
and this mortal shall put on immortality. And thus the body, being the source 
of no uneasiness because it can feel no want, shall be animated by a spirit 
perfectly pure and happy, and shall enjoy unbroken peace.</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 20. The resurrection to damnation" prev="xix" next="xxi" id="xx">

<h3 id="xx-p0.1">Chapter 20</h3><p class="par" id="xx-p1">19. Now he whose soul does not die to this world and begin here to be 
conformed to the truth, falls when the body dies into a more terrible death, 
and shall revive, not to change his earthly for a heavenly habitation, but to 
endure the penalty of his sin.</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 21. Neither body nor soul extinguished at death" prev="xx" next="xxii" id="xxi">
<h3 id="xxi-p0.1">Chapter 21</h3><p class="Body" id="xxi-p1">And so faith clings to the assurance, and we must believe that it is so in 
fact, that neither the human soul nor the human body suffers complete 
extinction, but that the wicked rise again to endure inconceivable punishment, 
and the good to receive eternal life.</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 22. God alone to be enjoyed" prev="xxi" next="xxiii" id="xxii">

<h3 id="xxii-p0.1">Chapter 22</h3><p class="par" id="xxii-p1">20. Among all these things, then, those only are the true objects of enjoyment 
which we have spoken of as eternal and unchangeable. The rest are for use, 
that we may be able to arrive at the full enjoyment of the former. We, 
however, who enjoy and use other things are things ourselves. For a great 
thing truly is man, made after the image and similitude of God, not as 
respects the mortal body in which he is clothed, but as respects the rational 
soul by which he is exalted in honour above the beasts. And so it becomes an 
important question, whether men ought to enjoy, or to use, themselves, or to 
do both. For we are commanded to love one another: but it is a question 
whether man is to be loved by man for his own sake, or for the sake of 
something else. If it is for his own sake, we enjoy him; if it is for the sake 
of something else, we use him. It seems to me, then, that he is to be loved 
for the sake of something else. For if a thing is to be loved for its own 
sake, then in the enjoyment of it consists a happy life, the hope of which at 
least, if not yet the reality, is our comfort in the present time. But a curse 
is pronounced on him who places his hope in man.</p>

<p class="par" id="xxii-p2">21. Neither ought any one to have joy in himself, if you look at the matter 
clearly, because no one ought to love even himself for his own sake, but for 
the sake of Him who is the true object of enjoyment. For a man is never in so 
good a state as when his whole life is a journey towards the unchangeable 
life, and his affections are entirely fixed upon that. If, however, he loves 
himself for his own sake, he does not look at himself in relation to God, but 
turns his mind in upon himself, and so is not occupied with anything that is 
unchangeable. And thus he does not enjoy himself at his best, because he is 
better when his mind is fully fixed upon, and his affections wrapped up in, 
the unchangeable good, than when he turns from that to enjoy even himself. 
Wherefore if you ought not to love even yourself for your own sake, but for 
His in whom your love finds its most worthy object, no other man has a right 
to be angry if you love him too for God's sake. For this is the law of love 
that has been laid down by Divine authority: "Thou shalt love thy neighbour as 
thyself;" but, "Thou shalt love God with all thy heart, and with all thy soul, 
and with all thy mind:" so that you are to concentrate all your thoughts, your 
whole life, and your whole intelligence upon Him from whom you derive all that 
you bring. For when He says, "With all thy heart, and with all thy soul, and 
with all thy mind," He means that no part of our life is to be unoccupied, and 
to afford room, as it were, for the wish to enjoy some other object, but that 
whatever else may suggest itself to us as an object worthy of love is to be 
borne into the same channel in which the whole current of our affections 
flows. Whoever, then, loves his neighbour aright, ought to urge upon him that 
he too should love God with his whole heart, and soul, and mind. For in this 
way, loving his neighbour as himself, a man turns the whole current of his 
love both for himself and his neighbour into the channel of the love of God, 
which suffers no stream to be drawn off from itself by whose diversion its own 
volume would be diminished.</p>
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 23. Man needs no injunction to love himself and his own body" prev="xxii" next="xxiv" id="xxiii">
<h3 id="xxiii-p0.1">Chapter 23</h3>
<p class="par" id="xxiii-p1">22. Those things which are objects of use are not all, however, to be loved, 
but those only which are either united with us in a common relation to God, 
such as a man or an angel, or are so related to us as to need the goodness of 
God through our instrumentality, such as the body. For assuredly the martyrs 
did not love the wickedness of their persecutors, although they used it to 
attain the favour of God. As, then, there are four kinds of things that are to 
be loved,—first, that which is above us; second, ourselves; third, that which 
is on a level with us; fourth, that which is beneath us,—no precepts need be 
given about the second and fourth of these. For, however far a man may fall 
away from the truth, he still continues to love himself, and to love his own 
body. The soul which flies away from the unchangeable Light, the Ruler of all 
things, does so that it may rule over itself and over its own body; and so it 
cannot but love both itself and its own body.</p>

<p class="par" id="xxiii-p2">23. Moreover, it thinks it has attained something very great if it is able to 
lord it over its companions, that is, other men. For it is inherent in the 
sinful soul to desire above all things, and to claim as due to itself, that 
which is properly due to God only. Now such love of itself is more correctly 
called hate. For it is not just that it should desire what is beneath it to be 
obedient to it while itself will not obey its own superior; and most justly 
has it been said, "He who loveth iniquity hateth his own soul." And 
accordingly the soul becomes weak, and endures much suffering about the mortal 
body. For, of course, it must love the body, and be grieved at its corruption; 
and the immortality and incorruptibility of the body spring out of the health 
of the soul. Now the health of the soul is to cling steadfastly to the better 
part, that is, to the unchangeable God. But when it aspires to lord it even 
over those who are by nature its equals,—that is, its fellow-men,—this is a 
reach of arrogance utterly intolerable.</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 24. No man hates his own flesh, not even those who abuse it" prev="xxiii" next="xxv" id="xxiv">

<h3 id="xxiv-p0.1">Chapter 24</h3>
<p class="par" id="xxiv-p1">24. No man, then, hates himself. On this point, indeed, no question was ever 
raised by any sect. But neither does any man hate his own body. For the 
apostle says truly, "No man ever yet hated his own flesh." And when some 
people say that they would rather be without a body altogether, they entirely 
deceive themselves. For it is not their body, but its corruptions and its 
heaviness, that they hate. And so it is not no body, but an uncorrupted and 
very light body, that they want. But they think a body of that kind would be 
no body at all, because they think such a thing as that must be a spirit. And 
as to the fact that they seem in some sort to scourge their bodies by 
abstinence and toil, those who do this in the right spirit do it not that they 
may get rid of their body, but that they may have it in subjection and ready 
for every needful work. For they strive by a kind of toilsome exercise of the 
body itself to root out those lusts that are hurtful to the body, that is, 
those habits and affections of the soul that lead to the enjoyment of unworthy 
objects. They are not destroying themselves; they are taking care of their 
health.</p>

<p class="par" id="xxiv-p2">25. Those, on the other hand, who do this in a perverse spirit, make war upon 
their own body as if it were a natural enemy. And in this matter they are led 
astray by a mistaken interpretation of what they read: "The flesh lusteth 
against the spirit, and the spirit against the flesh, and these are contrary 
the one to the other." For this is said of the carnal habit yet unsubdued, 
against which the spirit lusteth, not to destroy the body, but to eradicate 
the lust of the body—i.e., its evil habit—and thus to make it subject to the 
spirit, which is what the order of nature demands. For as, after the 
resurrection, the body, having become wholly subject to the spirit, will live 
in perfect peace to all eternity; even in this life we must make it an object 
to have the carnal habit changed for the better, so that its inordinate 
affections may not war against the soul. And until this shall take place, "the 
flesh lusteth against the spirit, and the spirit against the flesh;" the 
spirit struggling, not in hatred, but for the mastery, because it desires that 
what it loves should be subject to the higher principle; and the fleshy 
struggling, not in hatred, but because of the bondage of habit which it has 
derived from its parent stock, and which has grown in upon it by a law of 
nature till it has become inveterate. The spirit, then, in subduing the flesh, 
is working as it were to destroy the ill founded peace of an evil habit, and 
to bring about the real peace which springs out of a good habit. Nevertheless, 
not even those who, led astray by false notions, hate their bodies would be 
prepared to sacrifice one eye, even supposing they could do so without 
suffering any pain, and that they had as much sight left in one as they 
formerly had in two, unless some object was to be attained which would 
overbalance the loss. This and other indications of the same kind are 
sufficient to show those who candidly seek the truth how well-founded is the 
statement of the apostle when he says, "No man ever yet hated his own flesh." 
He adds too, "but nourisheth and cherisheth it, even as the Lord the Church".</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 25. A man may love something more than his body, but does not therefore hate his body" prev="xxiv" next="xxvi" id="xxv">

<h3 id="xxv-p0.1">Chapter 25</h3>
<p class="par" id="xxv-p1">26. Man, therefore, ought to be taught the due measure of loving, that is, in 
what measure he may love himself so as to be of service to himself. For that 
he does love himself, and does desire to do good to himself, nobody but a fool 
would doubt. He is to be taught, too, in what measure to love his body, so as 
to care for it wisely and within due limits. For it is equally manifest that 
he loves his body also, and desires to keep it safe and sound. And yet a man 
may have something that he loves better than the safety and soundness of his 
body. For many have been found voluntarily to suffer both pains and 
amputations of some of their limbs that they might obtain other objects which 
they valued more highly. But no one is to be told not to desire the safety and 
health of his body because there is something he desires more. For the miser, 
though he loves money, buys bread for himself,—that is, he gives away money 
that he is very fond of and desires to heap up,—but it is because he values 
more highly the bodily health which the bread sustains. It is superfluous to 
argue longer on a point so very plain, but this is just what the error of 
wicked men often compels us to do.</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 26. The command to love God and our neighbour includes a command to love ourselves" prev="xxv" next="xxvii" id="xxvi">

<h3 id="xxvi-p0.1">Chapter 26</h3>
<p class="par" id="xxvi-p1">27. Seeing, then, that there is no need of a command that every man should 
love himself and his own body,—seeing, that is, that we love ourselves, and 
what is beneath us but connected with us, through a law of nature which has 
never been violated, and which is common to us with the beasts (for even the 
beasts love themselves and their own bodies),—it only remained necessary to 
lay injunctions upon us in regard to God above us, and our neighbour beside 
us. "Thou shalt love," He says, "the Lord thy God with all thy heart, and with 
all thy soul, and with all thy mind; and thou shalt love thy neighbour as 
thyself. On these two commandments hang all the law and the prophets." Thus 
the end of the commandment is love, and that twofold, the love of God and the 
love of our neighbour. Now, if you take yourself in your entirety,—that is, 
soul and body together,—and your neighbour in his entirety, soul and body 
together (for man is made up of soul and body), you will find that none of the 
classes of things that are to be loved is overlooked in these two 
commandments. For though, when the love of God comes first, and the measure of 
our love for Him is prescribed in such terms that it is evident all other 
things are to find their centre in Him, nothing seems to be said about our 
love for ourselves; yet when it is said, "Thou shalt love thy neighbour as 
thyself," it at once becomes evident that our love for ourselves has not been 
overlooked.</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 27. The order of love" prev="xxvi" next="xxviii" id="xxvii">

<h3 id="xxvii-p0.1">Chapter 27</h3><p class="par" id="xxvii-p1">28. Now he is a man of just and holy life who forms an unprejudiced estimate 
of things, and keeps his affections also under strict control, so that he 
neither loves what he ought not to love, nor fails to love what he ought to 
love, nor loves that more which ought to be loved less, nor loves that equally 
which ought to be loved either less or more, nor loves that less or more which 
ought to be loved equally. No sinner is to be loved as a sinner; and every man 
is to be loved as a man for God's sake; but God is to be loved for His own 
sake. And if God is to be loved more than any man, each man ought to love God 
more than himself. Likewise we ought to love another man better than our own 
body, because all things are to be loved in reference to God, and another man 
can have fellowship with us in the enjoyment of God, whereas our body cannot; 
for the body only lives through the soul, and it is by the soul that we enjoy 
God.</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 28. How we are to decide whom to aid" prev="xxvii" next="xxix" id="xxviii">

<h3 id="xxviii-p0.1">Chapter 28</h3>
<p class="par" id="xxviii-p1">29. Further, all men are to be loved equally. But since you cannot do good to 
all, you are to pay special regard to those who, by the accidents of time, or 
place, or circumstance, are brought into closer connection with you. For, 
suppose that you had a great deal of some commodity, and felt bound to give it 
away to somebody who had none, and that it could not be given to more than one 
person; if two persons presented themselves, neither of whom had either from 
need or relationship a greater claim upon you than the other, you could do 
nothing fairer than choose by lot to which you would give what could not be 
given to both. Just so among men: since you cannot consult for the good of 
them all, you must take the matter as decided for you by a sort of lot, 
according as each man happens for the time being to be more closely connected 
with you.</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 29. We are to desire and endeavour that all men may love God" prev="xxviii" next="xxx" id="xxix">
<h3 id="xxix-p0.1">Chapter 29</h3>
<p class="par" id="xxix-p1">30. Now of all who can with us enjoy God, we love partly those to whom we 
render services, partly those who render services to us, partly those who both 
help us in our need and in turn are helped by us, partly those upon whom we 
confer no advantage and from whom we look for none. We ought to desire, 
however, that they should all join with us in loving God, and all the 
assistance that we either give them or accept from them should tend to that 
one end. For in the theatres, dens of iniquity though they be, if a man is 
fond of a particular actor, and enjoys his art as a great or even as the very 
greatest good, he is fond of all who join with him in admiration of his 
favourite, not for their own sakes, but for the sake of him whom they admire 
in common; and the more fervent he is in his admiration, the more he works in 
every way he can to secure new admirers for him, and the more anxious he 
becomes to show him to others; and if he find any one comparatively 
indifferent, he does all he can to excite his interest by urging his 
favorite's merits: if, however, he meet with any one who opposes him, he is 
exceedingly displeased by such a man's contempt of his favourite, and strives 
in every way he can to remove it. Now, if this be so, what does it become us 
to do who live in the fellowship of the love of God, the enjoyment of whom is 
true happiness of life, to whom all who love Him owe both their own existence 
and the love they bear Him, concerning whom we have no fear that any one who 
comes to know Him will be disappointed in Him, and who desires our love, not 
for any gain to Himself, but that those who love Him may obtain an eternal 
reward, even Himself whom they love? And hence it is that we love even our 
enemies. For we do not fear them, seeing they cannot take away from us what we 
love; but we pity them rather, because the more they hate us the more are they 
separated from Him whom we love. For if they would turn to Him, they must of 
necessity love Him as the supreme good, and love us too as partakers with them 
in so great a blessing.</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 30. Whether angels are to be reckoned our neighbours" prev="xxix" next="xxxi" id="xxx">

<h3 id="xxx-p0.1">Chapter 30</h3>
<p class="par" id="xxx-p1">31. There arises further in this connection a question about angels. For they 
are happy in the enjoyment of Him whom we long to enjoy; and the more we enjoy 
Him in this life as through a glass darkly, the more easy do we find it to 
bear our pilgrimage, and the more eagerly do we long for its termination. But 
it is not irrational to ask whether in those two commandments is included the 
love of angels also. For that He who commanded us to love our neighbour made 
no exception, as far as men are concerned, is shown both by our Lord Himself 
in the Gospel, and by the Apostle Paul. For when the man to whom our Lord 
delivered those two commandments, and to whom He said that on these hang all 
the law and the prophets, asked Him, "And who is my neighbour?" He told him of 
a certain man who, going down from Jerusalem to Jericho, fell among thieves, 
and was severely wounded by them, and left naked and half dead. And He showed 
him that nobody was neighbour to this man except him who took pity upon him 
and came forward to relieve and care for him. And the man who had asked the 
question admitted the truth of this when he was himself interrogated in turn. 
To whom our Lord says, "Go and do thou likewise;" teaching us that he is our 
neighbour whom it is our duty to help in his need, or whom it would be our 
duty to help if he were in need. Whence it follows, that he whose duty it 
would be in turn to help us is our neighbour. For the name "neighbour" is a 
relative one, and no one can be neighbour except to a neighbour. And, again, 
who does not see that no exception is made of any one as a person to whom the 
offices of mercy may be denied when our Lord extends the rule even to our 
enemies? "Love your enemies, do good to them that hate you."</p>

<p class="par" id="xxx-p2">32. And so also the Apostle Paul teaches when he says: "For this, Thou shalt 
not commit adultery, Thou shalt not kill, Thou shalt not steal, Thou shalt not 
bear false witness, Thou shalt not covet; and if there be any other 
commandment, it is briefly comprehended in this saying, namely, Thou shalt 
love thy neighbour as thyself. Love worketh no ill to his neighbour." Whoever 
then supposes that the apostle did not embrace every man in this precept, is 
compelled to admit, what is at once most absurd and most pernicious, that the 
apostle thought it no sin, if a man were not a Christian or were an enemy, to 
commit adultery with his wife, or to kill him, or to covet his goods. And as 
nobody but a fool would say this, it is clear that every man is to be 
considered our neighbour, because we are to work no ill to any man.</p>

<p class="par" id="xxx-p3">33. But now, if every one to whom we ought to show, or who ought to show to 
us, the offices of mercy is by right called a neighbour, it is manifest 
that the command to love our neighbour embraces the holy angels also, seeing 
that so great offices of mercy have been performed by them on our behalf, as 
may easily be shown by turning the attention to many passages of Holy 
Scripture. And on this ground even God Himself, our Lord, desired to be called 
our neighbour. For our Lord Jesus Christ points to Himself under the figure of 
the man who brought aid to him who was lying half dead on the road, wounded 
and abandoned by the robbers. And the Psalmist says in his prayer, "I behaved 
myself as though he had been my friend or brother." But as the Divine nature 
is of higher excellence than, and far removed above, our nature, the command 
to love God is distinct from that to love our neighbour. For He shows us pity 
on account of His own goodness, but we show pity to one another on account of 
His;—that is, He pities us that we may fully enjoy Himself; we pity one 
another that we may fully enjoy Him.</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 31. God uses rather than enjoys us" prev="xxx" next="xxxii" id="xxxi">

<h3 id="xxxi-p0.1">Chapter 31</h3>
<p class="par" id="xxxi-p1">34. And on this ground, when we say that we enjoy only that which we love for 
its own sake, and that nothing is a true object of enjoyment except that which 
makes us happy, and that all other things are for use, there seems still to be 
something that requires explanation. For God loves us, and Holy Scripture 
frequently sets before us the love He has towards us. In what way then does He 
love us? As objects of use or as objects of enjoyment? If He enjoys us, He 
must be in need of good from us, and no sane man will say that; for all the 
good we enjoy is either Himself, or what comes from Himself. And no one can be 
ignorant or in doubt as to the fact that the light stands in no need of the 
glitter of the things it has itself lit up. The Psalmist says most plainly, "I 
said to the LORD, Thou art my God, for Thou neediest not my goodness." He does 
not enjoy us then, but makes use of us. For if He neither enjoys nor uses us, 
I am at a loss to discover in what way He can love us.</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 32. In what way God uses man" prev="xxxi" next="xxxiii" id="xxxii">

<h3 id="xxxii-p0.1">Chapter 32</h3>
<p class="par" id="xxxii-p1">34. But neither does He use after our fashion of using. For when we use 
objects, we do so with a view to the full enjoyment of the goodness of God. 
God, however, in His use of us, has reference to His own goodness. For it is 
because He is good we exist; and so far as we truly exist we are good. And, 
further, because He is also just, we cannot with impunity be evil; and so far 
as we are evil, so far is our existence less complete. Now He is the first and 
supreme existence, who is altogether unchangeable, and who could say in the 
fullest sense of the words, "I AM THAT I AM," and "Thou shalt say to them, I 
AM has sent me unto you;" So that all other things that exist, both owe their 
existence entirely to Him, and are good only so far as He has given it to them 
to be so. That use, then, which God is said to make of us has no reference to 
His own advantage, but to ours only; and, so far as He is concerned, has 
reference only to His goodness. When we take pity upon a man and care for him, 
it is for his advantage we do so; but somehow or other our own advantage 
follows by a sort of natural consequence, for God does not leave the mercy we 
show to him who needs it to go without reward. Now this is our highest reward, 
that we should fully enjoy Him, and that all who enjoy Him should enjoy one 
another in Him.</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 33. In what way man should be enjoyed" prev="xxxii" next="xxxiv" id="xxxiii">

<h3 id="xxxiii-p0.1">Chapter 33</h3>
<p class="par" id="xxxiii-p1">36. For if we find our happiness complete in one another, we stop short upon 
the road, and place our hope of happiness in man or angel. Now the proud man 
and the proud angel arrogate this to themselves, and are glad to have the hope 
of others fixed upon them. But, on the contrary, the holy man and the holy 
angel, even when we are weary and anxious to stay with them and rest in them, 
set themselves to recruit our energies with the provision which they have 
received of God for us or for themselves; and then urge us thus refreshed to 
go on our way towards Him, in the enjoyment of whom we find our common 
happiness. For even the apostle exclaims, "Was Paul crucified for you? Or were 
ye baptized in the name of Paul?" And again: "Neither is he that planteth 
anything, neither he that watereth; but God that giveth the increase." And the 
angel admonisheth the man who is about to worship him, that he should rather 
worship Him who is his Master, and under whom he himself is a fellow-servant.</p>

<p class="par" id="xxxiii-p2">37. But when you have joy of a man in God, it is God rather than man that you 
enjoy. For you enjoy Him by whom you are made happy, and you rejoice to have 
come to Him in whose presence you place your hope of joy. And accordingly, 
Paul says to Philemon, "Yea, brother, let me have joy of thee in the Lord." 
For if he had not added "in the Lord," but had only said, "Let me have joy of 
thee," he would have implied that he fixed his hope of happiness upon him, 
although even in the immediate context to "enjoy" is used in the sense of to 
"use with delight." For when the thing that we love is near us, it is a matter 
of course that it should bring delight with it. And if you pass beyond this 
delight, and make it a means to that which you are permanently to rest in, you 
are using it, and it is an abuse of language to say that you enjoy it. But if 
you cling to it, and rest in it, finding your happiness complete in it, then 
you may be truly and properly said to enjoy it. And this we must never do 
except in the case of the Blessed Trinity, who is the Supreme and Unchangeable 
God.</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 34. Christ the first way to God" prev="xxxiii" next="xxxv" id="xxxiv">

<h3 id="xxxiv-p0.1">Chapter 34</h3>
<p class="par" id="xxxiv-p1">38. And mark that even when He who is Himself the Truth and the Word, by whom 
all things were made, had been made flesh that He might dwell among us, the 
apostle yet says: "Yea, though we have known Christ after the flesh, yet now 
henceforth know we Him no more." For Christ, desiring not only to give the 
possession to those who had completed the journey, but also to be Himself the 
way to those who were just setting out, determined to take a fleshly body. 
Whence also that expression, "The Lord created me in the beginning of His 
way," that is, that those who wished to come might begin their journey in Him. 
The apostle, therefore, although still on the way, and following after God who 
called him to the reward of His heavenly calling, yet forgetting those things 
which were behind, and pressing on towards those things which were before, had 
already passed over the beginning of the way, and had now no further need of 
it; yet by this way all must commence their journey who desire to attain to 
the truth, and to rest in eternal life. For He says: "I am the way, and the 
truth, and the life;" that is, by me men come, to me they come, in me they 
rest. For when we come to Him, we come to the Father also, because through an 
equal an equal is known; and the Holy Spirit binds, and as it were seals us, 
so that we are able to rest permanently in the supreme and unchangeable God. 
And hence we may learn how essential it is that nothing should detain us on 
the way, when not even our Lord Himself, so far as He has condescended to be 
our way, is willing to detain us, but wishes us rather to press on; and, 
instead of weakly clinging to temporal things, even though these have been put 
on and worn by Him for our salvation, to pass over them quickly, and to 
struggle to attain unto Himself, who has freed our nature from the bondage of 
temporal things, and has set it down at the right hand of His Father.</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 35. The fulfilment and end of Scripture is the love of God and our neighbour" prev="xxxiv" next="xxxvi" id="xxxv">

<h3 id="xxxv-p0.1">Chapter 35</h3>
<p class="par" id="xxxv-p1">39. Of all, then, that has been said since we entered upon the discussion 
about things, this is the sum: that we should clearly understand that the 
fulfilment and the end of the Law, and of all Holy Scripture, is the love of 
an object which is to be enjoyed, and the love of an object which can enjoy 
that other in fellowship with ourselves. For there is no need of a command 
that each man should love himself. The whole temporal dispensation for our 
salvation, therefore, was framed by the providence of God that we might know 
this truth and be able to act upon it; and we ought to use that dispensation, 
not with such love and delight as if it were a good to rest in, but with a 
transient feeling rather, such as we have towards the road, or carriages, or 
other things that are merely means. Perhaps some other comparison can be found 
that will more suitably express the idea that we are to love the things by 
which we are borne only for the sake of that towards which we are borne.</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 36. That interpretation of Scripture which builds us up  in love is not perniciously deceptive nor mendacious, even though it be  faulty. The interpreter, however should be corrected" prev="xxxv" next="xxxvii" id="xxxvi">

<h3 id="xxxvi-p0.1">Chapter 36</h3>
<p class="par" id="xxxvi-p1">40. Whoever, then, thinks that he understands the Holy Scriptures, or any part 
of them, but puts such an interpretation upon them as does not tend to build 
up this twofold love of God and our neighbour, does not yet understand them as 
he ought. If, on the other hand, a man draws a meaning from them that may be 
used for the building up of love, even though he does not happen upon the 
precise meaning which the author whom he reads intended to express in that 
place, his error is not pernicious, and he is wholly clear from the charge of 
deception. For there is involved in deception the intention to say what is 
false; and we find plenty of people who intend to deceive, but nobody who 
wishes to be deceived. Since, then, the man who knows practices deceit, and 
the ignorant man is practiced upon, it is quite clear that in any particular 
case the man who is deceived is a better man than he who deceives, seeing that 
it is better to suffer than to commit injustice. Now every man who lies 
commits an injustice; and if any man thinks that a lie is ever useful, he must 
think that injustice is sometimes useful. For no liar keeps faith in the 
matter about which he lies. He wishes, of course, that the man to whom he lies 
should place confidence in him; and yet he betrays his confidence by lying to 
him. Now every man who breaks faith is unjust. Either, then, injustice is 
sometimes useful (which is impossible), or a lie is never useful.</p>

<p class="par" id="xxxvi-p2">41. Whoever takes another meaning out of Scripture than the writer intended, 
goes astray, but not through any falsehood in Scripture. Nevertheless, as I 
was going to say, if his mistaken interpretation tends to build up love, which 
is the end of the commandment, he goes astray in much the same way as a man 
who by mistake quits the high road, but yet reaches through the fields the 
same place to which the road leads. He is to be corrected, however, and to be 
shown how much better it is not to quit the straight road, lest, if he get 
into a habit of going astray, he may sometimes take cross roads, or even go in 
the wrong direction altogether.</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 37. Dangers of mistaken interpretation" prev="xxxvi" next="xxxviii" id="xxxvii">
<h3 id="xxxvii-p0.1">Chapter 37</h3>
<p class="Body" id="xxxvii-p1">For if he takes up rashly a meaning which the author whom he is reading did 
not intend, he often falls in with other statements which he cannot harmonize 
with this meaning. And if he admits that these statements are true and 
certain, then it follows that the meaning he had put upon the former passage 
cannot be the true one: and so it comes to pass, one can hardly tell how, 
that, out of love for his own opinion, he begins to feel more angry with 
Scripture than he is with himself. And if he should once permit that evil to 
creep in, it will utterly destroy him. "For we walk by faith, not by sight." 
Now faith will totter if the authority of Scripture begin to shake. And then, 
if faith totter, love itself will grow cold. For if a man has fallen from 
faith, he must necessarily also fall from love; for he cannot love what he 
does not believe to exist. But if he both believes and loves, then through 
good works, and through diligent attention to the precepts of morality, he 
comes to hope also that he shall attain the object of his love. And so these 
are the three things to which all knowledge and all prophecy are subservient: 
faith, hope, love.</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 38. Love never faileth" prev="xxxvii" next="xxxix" id="xxxviii">

<h3 id="xxxviii-p0.1">Chapter 38</h3>
<p class="par" id="xxxviii-p1">42. But sight shall displace faith; and hope shall be swallowed up in that 
perfect bliss to which we shall come: love, on the other hand, shall wax 
greater when these others fail. For if we love by faith that which as yet we 
see not, how much more shall we love it when we begin to see! And if we love 
by hope that which as yet we have not reached, how much more shall we love it 
when we reach it! For there is this great difference between things temporal 
and things eternal, that a temporal object is valued more before we possess 
it, and begins to prove worthless the moment we attain it, because it does not 
satisfy the soul, which has its only true and sure resting-place in eternity: 
an eternal object, on the other hand, is loved with greater ardour when it is 
in possession than while it is still an object of desire, for no one in his 
longing for it can set a higher value on it than really belongs to it, so as 
to think it comparatively worthless when he finds it of less value than he 
thought; on the contrary, however high the value any man may set upon it when 
he is on his way to possess it, he will find it, when it comes into his 
possession, of higher value still.</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 39. He who is mature in faith hope and love, needs Scripture no longer" prev="xxxviii" next="xl" id="xxxix">

<h3 id="xxxix-p0.1">Chapter 39</h3>
<p class="par" id="xxxix-p1">43. And thus a man who is resting upon faith, hope and love, and who keeps a 
firm hold upon these, does not need the Scriptures except for the purpose of 
instructing others. Accordingly, many live without copies of the Scriptures, 
even in solitude, on the strength of these three graces. So that in their 
case, I think, the saying is already fulfilled: "Whether there be prophecies, 
they shall fail; whether there be tongues, they shall cease; whether there be 
knowledge, it shall vanish away." Yet by means of these instruments (as they 
may be called), so great an edifice of faith and love has been built up in 
them, that, holding to what is perfect, they do not seek for what is only in 
part perfect—of course, I mean, so far as is possible in this life; for, in 
comparison with the future life, the life of no just and holy man is perfect 
here. Therefore the apostle says: "Now abideth faith, hope, charity, these 
three; but the greatest of these is charity:" because, when a man shall have 
reached the eternal world, while the other two graces will fail, love will 
remain greater and more assured.</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 40. What manner of reader Scripture demands" prev="xxxix" next="iv.iii" id="xl">

<h3 id="xl-p0.1">Chapter 40</h3>
<p class="par" id="xl-p1">44. And, therefore, if a man fully understands that "the end of the 
commandment is charity, out of a pure heart, and of a good conscience, and of 
faith unfeigned," and is bent upon making all his understanding of Scripture 
to bear upon these three graces, he may come to the interpretation of these 
books with an easy mind. For while the apostle says "love," he adds "out of a 
pure heart," to provide against anything being loved but that which is worthy 
of love. And he joins with this "a good conscience," in reference to hope; 
for, if a man has the burthen of a bad conscience, he despairs of ever 
reaching that which he believes in and loves. And in the third place he says: 
"and of faith unfeigned." For if our faith is free from all hypocrisy, then we 
both abstain from loving what is unworthy of our love, and by living uprightly 
we are able to indulge the hope that our hope shall not be in vain. For these 
reasons I have been anxious to speak about the objects of faith, as far as I 
thought it necessary for my present purpose; for much has already been said on 
this subject in other volumes, either by others or by myself. And so let this 
be the end of the present book. In the next I shall discuss, as far as God 
shall give me light, the subject of signs.</p></div3>

</div2>

<div2 type="book" title="Book II." progress="20.79%" prev="xl" next="iv.iii.i" id="iv.iii">

<div3 title="Argument" prev="iv.iii" next="iv.iii.ii" id="iv.iii.i">

<p class="Body" id="iv.iii.i-p1"><i>Having completed his exposition of things, the author now proceeds to 
discuss the subject of signs. He first defines what a sign is, and shows that 
there are two classes of signs, the natural and the conventional. Of 
conventional signs (which are the only class here noticed), words are the most 
numerous and important, and are those with which the interpreter of Scripture is 
chiefly concerned. The difficulties and obscurities of Scripture spring chiefly 
from two sources, unknown and ambiguous signs. The present book deals only with 
unknown signs, the ambiguities of language being reserved for treatment in the 
next book. The difficulty arising from ignorance of signs is to be removed by 
learning the Greek and Hebrew languages, in which Scripture is written, by 
comparing the various translations, and by attending to the context. In the 
interpretation of figurative expressions, knowledge of things is as necessary as 
knowledge of words; and the various sciences and arts of the heathen, so far as 
they are true and useful, may be turned to account in removing our ignorance of 
signs, whether these be direct or figurative. Whilst exposing the folly and 
futility of many heathen superstitions and practices, the author points out how 
all that is sound and useful in their science and philosophy may be turned to a 
Christian use. And in conclusion, he shows the spirit in which it behoves us to 
address ourselves to the study and interpretation of the sacred books. </i></p>


</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 1. Signs, their nature and variety" prev="iv.iii.i" next="iv.iii.iii" id="iv.iii.ii">

<h3 id="iv.iii.ii-p0.1">Chapter 1</h3>
<p class="par" id="iv.iii.ii-p1">1. As when I was writing about things, I introduced the subject with a 
warning against attending to anything but what they are in themselves, even 
though they are signs of something else, so now, when I come in its turn to 
discuss the subject of signs, I lay down this direction, not to attend to what 
they are in themselves, but to the fact that they are signs, that is, to what 
they signify. For a sign is a thing which, over and above the impression it 
makes on the senses, causes something else to come into the mind as a 
consequence of itself: as when we see a footprint, we conclude that an animal 
whose footprint this is has passed by; and when we see smoke, we know that 
there is fire beneath; and when we hear the voice of a living man, we think of 
the feeling in his mind; and when the trumpet sounds, soldiers know that they 
are to advance or retreat, or do whatever else the state of the battle 
requires.</p>

<p class="par" id="iv.iii.ii-p2">2. Now some signs are natural, others conventional. Natural signs are those 
which, apart from any intention or desire of using them as signs, do yet lead 
to the knowledge of something else, as, for example, smoke when it indicates 
fire. For it is not from any intention of making it a sign that it is so, but 
through attention to experience we come to know that fire is beneath, even 
when nothing but smoke can be seen. And the footprint of an animal passing by 
belongs to this class of signs. And the countenance of an angry or sorrowful 
man indicates the feeling in his mind, independently of his will: and in the 
same way every other emotion of the mind is betrayed by the telltale 
countenance, even though we do nothing with the intention of making it known. 
This class of signs however, it is no part of my design to discuss at present. 
But as it comes under this division of the subject, I could not altogether 
pass it over. It will be enough to have noticed it thus far.</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 2. Of the kind of signs we are now concerned with" prev="iv.iii.ii" next="iv.iii.iv" id="iv.iii.iii">
<h3 id="iv.iii.iii-p0.1">Chapter 2</h3>
<p class="par" id="iv.iii.iii-p1">3. Conventional signs, on the other hand, are those which living beings 
mutually exchange for the purpose of showing, as well as they can, the 
feelings of their minds, or their perceptions, or their thoughts. Nor is there 
any reason for giving a sign except the desire of drawing forth and conveying 
into another's mind what the giver of the sign has in his own mind. We wish, 
then, to consider and discuss this class of signs so far as men are concerned 
with it, because even the signs which have been given us of God, and which are 
contained in the Holy Scriptures, were made known to us through men—those, 
namely, who wrote the Scriptures. The beasts, too, have certain signs among 
themselves by which they make known the desires in their mind. For when the 
poultry-cock has discovered food, he signals with his voice for the hen to run 
to him, and the dove by cooing calls his mate, or is called by her in turn; 
and many signs of the same kind are matters of common observation. Now whether 
these signs, like the expression or the cry of a man in grief, follow the 
movement of the mind instinctively and apart from any purpose, or whether they 
are really used with the purpose of signification, is another question, and 
does not pertain to the matter in hand. And this part of the subject I exclude 
from the scope of this work as not necessary to my present object.</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 3. Among signs, words hold the chief place" prev="iv.iii.iii" next="v_1" id="iv.iii.iv">

<h3 id="iv.iii.iv-p0.1">Chapter 3</h3><p class="par" id="iv.iii.iv-p1">4. Of the signs, then, by which men communicate their thoughts to one 
another, some relate to the sense of sight, some to that of hearing, a very 
few to the other senses. For, when we nod, we give no sign except to the eyes 
of the man to whom we wish by this sign to impart our desire. And some convey 
a great deal by the motion of the hands: and actors by movements of all their 
limbs give certain signs to the initiated, and, so to speak, address their 
conversation to the eyes: and the military standards and flags convey through 
the eyes the will of the commanders. And all these signs are as it were a kind 
of visible words. The signs that address themselves to the ear are, as I have 
said, more numerous, and for the most part consist of words. For though the 
bugle and the flute and the lyre frequently give not only a sweet but a 
significant sound, yet all these signs are very few in number compared with 
words. For among men words have obtained far and away the chief place as a 
means of indicating the thoughts of the mind. Our Lord, it is true, gave a 
sign through the odour of the ointment which was poured out upon His feet; and 
in the sacrament of His body and blood He signified His will through the sense 
of taste; and when by touching the hem of His garment the woman was made 
whole, the act was not wanting in significance. But the countless multitude of 
the signs through which men express their thoughts consist of words. For I 
have been able to put into words all those signs, the various classes of which 
I have briefly touched upon, but I could by no effort express words in terms 
of those signs.</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 4. Origin of writing" prev="iv.iii.iv" next="vi_1" id="v_1">

<h3 id="v_1-p0.1">Chapter 4</h3><p class="par" id="v_1-p1">5. But because words pass away as soon as they strike upon the air, and last 
no longer than their sound, men have by means of letters formed signs of 
words. Thus the sounds of the voice are made visible to the eye, not of course 
as sounds, but by means of certain signs. It has been found impossible, 
however, to make those signs common to all nations owing to the sin of discord 
among men, which springs from every man trying to snatch the chief place for 
himself. And that celebrated tower which was built to reach to heaven was an 
indication of this arrogance of spirit; and the ungodly men concerned in it 
justly earned the punishment of having not their minds only, but their tongues 
besides, thrown into confusion and discordance.</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 5. Scripture translated into various languages" prev="v_1" next="vii_1" id="vi_1">

<h3 id="vi_1-p0.1">Chapter 5</h3>
<p class="par" id="vi_1-p1">6. And hence it happened that even Holy Scripture, which brings a remedy for 
the terrible diseases of the human will, being at first set forth in one 
language, by means of which it could at the fit season be disseminated through 
the whole world, was interpreted into various tongues, and spread far and 
wide, and thus became known to the nations for their salvation. And in reading 
it, men seek nothing more than to find out the thought and will of those by 
whom it was written, and through these to find out the will of God, in 
accordance with which they believe these men to have spoken.</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 6. Use of the obscurities in Scripture which arise from its figurative language" prev="vi_1" next="viii_1" id="vii_1">

<h3 id="vii_1-p0.1">Chapter 6</h3>
<p class="par" id="vii_1-p1">7. But hasty and careless readers are led astray by many and manifold 
obscurities and ambiguities, substituting one meaning for another; and in some 
places they cannot hit upon even a fair interpretation. Some of the 
expressions are so obscure as to shroud the meaning in the thickest darkness. 
And I do not doubt that all this was divinely arranged for the purpose of 
subduing pride by toil, and of preventing a feeling of satiety in the 
intellect, which generally holds in small esteem what is discovered without 
difficulty. For why is it, I ask, that if any one says that there are holy and 
just men whose life and conversation the Church of Christ uses as a means of 
redeeming those who come to it from all kinds of superstitions, and making 
them through their imitation of good men members of its own body; men who, as 
good and true servants of God, have come to the baptismal font laying down the 
burdens of the world, and who rising thence do, through the implanting of the 
Holy Spirit, yield the fruit of a twofold love, a love, that is, of God and 
their neighbour;—how is it, I say, that if a man says this, he does not 
please his hearer so much as when he draws the same meaning from that passage 
in Canticles, where it is said of the Church, when it is being praised under 
the figure of a beautiful woman, "Thy teeth are like a flock of sheep that are 
shorn, which came up from the washing, whereof every one bears twins, and none 
is barren among them?" Does the hearer learn anything more than when he 
listens to the same thought expressed in the plainest language, without the 
help of this figure? And yet, I don't know why, I feel greater pleasure in 
contemplating holy men, when I view them as the teeth of the Church, tearing 
men away from their errors, and bringing them into the church's body, with all 
their harshness softened down, just as if they had been torn off and 
masticated by the teeth. It is with the greatest pleasure, too, that I 
recognize them under the figure of sheep that have been shorn, laying down the 
burthens of the world like fleeces, and coming up from the washing, i.e., from 
baptism, and all bearing twins, i.e., the twin commandments of love, and none 
among them barren in that holy fruit.</p>

<p class="par" id="vii_1-p2">8. But why I view them with greater delight under that aspect than if no such 
figure were drawn from the sacred books, though the fact would remain the same 
and the knowledge the same, is another question, and one very difficult to 
answer. Nobody, however, has any doubt about the facts, both that it is 
pleasanter in some cases to have knowledge communicated through figures and 
that what is attended with difficulty in the seeking gives greater pleasure in 
the finding.—For those who seek but do not find suffer from hunger. Those, 
again, who do not seek at all because they have what they require just beside 
them often grow languid from satiety. Now weakness from either of these causes 
is to be avoided. Accordingly the Holy Spirit has, with admirable wisdom and 
care for our welfare, so arranged the Holy Scriptures as by the plainer 
passages to satisfy our hunger, and by the more obscure to stimulate our 
appetite. For almost nothing is dug out of those obscure passages which may 
not be found set forth in the plainest language elsewhere.</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 7. Steps to wisdom: first, fear; second, piety; third,  knowledge; fourth, resolution; fifth, counsel; sixth, purification of heart;  seventh, stop or termination, wisdom" prev="vii_1" next="ix_1" id="viii_1">

<h3 id="viii_1-p0.1">Chapter 7</h3>
<p class="par" id="viii_1-p1">9. First of all, then, it is necessary that we should be led by the fear of 
God to seek the knowledge of His will, what He commands us to desire and what 
to avoid. Now this fear will of necessity excite in us the thought of our 
mortality and of the death that is before us, and crucify all the motions of 
pride as if our flesh were nailed to the tree. Next it is necessary to have 
our hearts subdued by piety, and not to run in the face of Holy Scripture, 
whether when understood it strikes at some of our sins, or, when not 
understood, we feel as if we could be wiser and give better commands 
ourselves. We must rather think and believe that whatever is there written, 
even though it be hidden, is better and truer than anything we could devise by 
our own wisdom.</p>

<p class="par" id="viii_1-p2">10. After these two steps of fear and piety, we come to the third step, 
knowledge, of which I have now undertaken to treat. For in this every earnest 
student of the Holy Scriptures exercises himself, to find nothing else in them 
but that God is to be loved for His own sake, and our neighbour for God's 
sake; and that God is to be loved with all the heart. and with all the soul, 
and with all the mind, and one's neighbour as one's self—that is, in such a 
way that all our love for our neighbour, like all our love for ourselves, 
should have reference to God. And on these two commandments I touched in the 
previous book when I was treating about things. It is necessary, then, that 
each man should first of all find in the Scriptures that he, through being 
entangled in the love of this world—i.e., of temporal things—has been drawn 
far away from such a love for God and such a love for his neighbour as 
Scripture enjoins. Then that fear which leads him to think of the judgment of 
God, and that piety which gives him no option but to believe in and submit to 
the authority of Scripture, compel him to bewail his condition. For the 
knowledge of a good hope makes a man not boastful, but sorrowful. And in this 
frame of mind he implores with unremitting prayers the comfort of the Divine 
help that he may not be overwhelmed in despair, and so he gradually comes to 
the fourth step,—that is, strength and resolution,—in which he hungers and 
thirsts after righteousness. For in this frame of mind he extricates himself 
from every form of fatal joy in transitory things, and turning away from 
these, fixes his affection on things eternal, to wit, the unchangeable Trinity 
in unity.</p>

<p class="par" id="viii_1-p3">11. And when, to the extent of his power, he has gazed upon this object 
shining from afar, and has felt that owing to the weakness of his sight he 
cannot endure that matchless light, then in the fifth step—that is, in the 
counsel of compassion—he cleanses his soul, which is violently agitated, and 
disturbs him with base desires, from the filth it has contracted. And at this 
stage he exercises himself diligently in the love of his neighbour; and when 
he has reached the point of loving his enemy, full of hopes and unbroken in 
strength, he mounts to the sixth step, in which he purifies the eye itself 
which can see God, so far as God can be seen by those who as far as possible 
die to this world. For men see Him just so far as they die to this world; and 
so far as they live to it they see Him not. But yet, although that light may 
begin to appear clearer, and not only more tolerable, but even more 
delightful, still it is only through a glass darkly that we are said to see, 
because we walk by faith, not by sight, while we continue to wander as 
strangers in this world, even though our conversation be in heaven. And at 
this stage, too, a man so purges the eye of his affections as not to place his 
neighbour before, or even in comparison with, the truth, and therefore not 
himself, because not him whom he loves as himself. Accordingly, that holy man 
will be so single and so pure in heart, that he will not step aside from the 
truth, either for the sake of pleasing men or with a view to avoid any of the 
annoyances which beset this life. Such a son ascends to wisdom which is the 
seventh and last step, and which he enjoys in peace and tranquility. For the 
fear of God is the beginning of wisdom. From that beginning, then, till we 
reach wisdom itself, our way is by the steps now described.</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 8. The canonical books" prev="viii_1" next="x_1" id="ix_1">

<h3 id="ix_1-p0.1">Chapter 8</h3>
<p class="par" id="ix_1-p1">12. But let us now go back to consider the third step here mentioned, for it 
is about it that I have set myself to speak and reason as the Lord shall grant 
me wisdom. The most skilful interpreter of the sacred writings, then, will be 
he who in the first place has read them all and retained them in his 
knowledge, if not yet with full understanding, still with such knowledge as 
reading gives,—those of them, at least, that are called canonical. For he 
will read the others with greater safety when built up in the belief of the 
truth, so that they will not take first possession of a weak mind, nor, 
cheating it with dangerous falsehoods and delusions, fill it with prejudices 
averse to a sound understanding. Now, in regard to the canonical Scriptures, 
he must follow the judgment of the greater number of catholic churches; and 
among these, of course, a high place must be given to such as have been 
thought worthy to be the seat of an apostle and to receive epistles. 
Accordingly, among the canonical Scriptures he will judge according to the 
following standard: to prefer those that are received by all the catholic 
churches to those which some do not receive. Among those, again, which are not 
received by all, he will prefer such as have the sanction of the greater 
number and those of greater authority, to such as are held by the smaller 
number and those of less authority. If, however, he shall find that some books 
are held by the greater number of churches, and others by the churches of 
greater authority (though this is not a very likely thing to happen), I think 
that in such a case the authority on the two sides is to be looked upon as 
equal.</p>

<p class="par" id="ix_1-p2">13. Now the whole canon of Scripture on which we say this judgment is to be 
exercised, is contained in the following books:—Five books of Moses, that is, 
Genesis, Exodus, Leviticus, Numbers, Deuteronomy; one book of Joshua the son 
of Nun; one of Judges; one short book called Ruth, which seems rather to 
belong to the beginning of Kings; next, four books of Kings, and two of 
Chronicles, these last not following one another, but running parallel, so to 
speak, and going over the same ground. The books now mentioned are history, 
which contains a connected narrative of the times, and follows the order of 
the events. There are other books which seem to follow no regular order, and 
are connected neither with the order of the preceding books nor with one 
another, such as Job, and Tobias, and Esther, and Judith, and the two books of 
Maccabees, and the two of Ezra, which last look more like a sequel to the 
continuous regular history which terminates with the books of Kings and 
Chronicles. Next are the Prophets, in which there is one book of the Psalms of 
David; and three books of Solomon, viz., Proverbs, Song of Songs, and 
Ecclesiastes. For two books, one called Wisdom and the other Ecclesiasticus, 
are ascribed to Solomon from a certain resemblance of style, but the most 
likely opinion is that they were written by Jesus the son of Sirach. Still 
they are to be reckoned among the prophetical books, since they have attained 
recognition as being authoritative. The remainder are the books which are 
strictly called the Prophets: twelve separate books of the prophets which are 
connected with one another, and having never been disjoined, are reckoned as 
one book; the names of these prophets are as follows:—Hosea, Joel, Amos, 
Obadiah, Jonah, Micah, Nahum, Habakkuk, Zephaniah, Haggai, Zechariah, Malachi; 
then there are the four greater prophets, Isaiah, Jeremiah, Daniel, Ezekiel. 
The authority of the Old Testament is contained within the limits of these 
forty-four books. That of the New Testament, again, is contained within the 
following:—Four books of the Gospel, according to Matthew, according to Mark, 
according to Luke, according to John; fourteen epistles of the Apostle 
Paul—one to the Romans, two to the Corinthians, one to the Galatians, to the 
Ephesians, to the Philippians, two to the Thessalonians, one to the 
Colossians, two to Timothy, one to Titus, to Philemon, to the Hebrews: two of 
Peter; three of John; one of Jude; and one of James; one book of the Acts of 
the Apostles; and one of the Revelation of John.</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 9. How we should proceed in studying Scripture" prev="ix_1" next="xi_1" id="x_1">

<h3 id="x_1-p0.1">Chapter 9</h3>
<p class="par" id="x_1-p1">14. In all these books those who fear God and are of a meek and pious 
disposition seek the will of God. And in pursuing this search the first rule 
to be observed is, as I said, to know these books, if not yet with the 
understanding, still to read them so as to commit them to memory, or at least 
so as not to remain wholly ignorant of them. Next, those matters that are 
plainly laid down in them, whether rules of life or rules of faith, are to be 
searched into more carefully and more diligently; and the more of these a man 
discovers, the more capacious does his understanding become. For among the 
things that are plainly laid down in Scripture are to be found all matters 
that concern faith and the manner of life,—to wit, hope and love, of which I 
have spoken in the previous book. After this, when we have made ourselves to a 
certain extent familiar with the language of Scripture, we may proceed to open 
up and investigate the obscure passages, and in doing so draw examples from 
the plainer expressions to throw light upon the more obscure, and use the 
evidence of passages about which there is no doubt to remove all hesitation in 
regard to the doubtful passages. And in this matter memory counts for a great 
deal; but if the memory be defective, no rules can supply the want.</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 10. Unknown or ambiguous signs prevent Scripture from being understood" prev="x_1" next="xii_1" id="xi_1">

<h3 id="xi_1-p0.1">Chapter 10</h3>
<p class="par" id="xi_1-p1">15. Now there are two causes which prevent what is written from being 
understood: its being veiled either under unknown, or under ambiguous signs. 
Signs are either proper or figurative. They are called proper when they are 
used to point out the objects they were designed to point out, as we say <span lang="LA" id="xi_1-p1.1">bos</span> 
when we mean an ox, because all men who with us use the Latin tongue call it 
by this name. Signs are figurative when the things themselves which we 
indicate by the proper names are used to signify something else, as we say 
bos, and understand by that syllable the ox, which is ordinarily called by 
that name; but then further by that ox understand a preacher of the gospel, as 
Scripture signifies, according to the apostle's explanation, when it says: 
"Thou shalt not muzzle the ox that treadeth out the corn."</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 11. Knowledge of languages especially of Greek and  Hebrew, necessary to remove ignorance of signs" prev="xi_1" next="xiii_1" id="xii_1">

<h3 id="xii_1-p0.1">Chapter 11</h3>
<p class="par" id="xii_1-p1">16. The great remedy for ignorance of proper signs is knowledge of languages. 
And men who speak the Latin tongue, of whom are those I have undertaken to 
instruct, need two other languages for the knowledge of Scripture, Hebrew and 
Greek, that they may have recourse to the original texts if the endless 
diversity of the Latin translators throw them into doubt. Although, indeed, we 
often find Hebrew words untranslated in the books, as for example, Amen, 
Hallelujah, Racha, Hosanna, and others of the same kind. Some of these, 
although they could have been translated, have been preserved in their 
original form on account of the more sacred authority that attaches to it, as 
for example, Amen and Hallelujah. Some of them, again, are said to be 
untranslatable into another tongue, of which the other two I have mentioned 
are examples. For in some languages there are words that cannot be translated 
into the idiom of another language. And this happens chiefly in the case of 
interjections, which are words that express rather an emotion of the mind than 
any part of a thought we have in our mind. And the two given above are said to 
be of this kind, Racha expressing the cry of an angry man, Hosanna that of a 
joyful man. But the knowledge of these languages is necessary, not for the 
sake of a few words like these which it is very easy to mark and to ask about, 
but, as has been said, on account of the diversities among translators. For 
the translations of the Scriptures from Hebrew into Greek can be counted, but 
the Latin translators are out of all number. For in the early days of the 
faith every man who happened to get his hands upon a Greek manuscript, and who 
thought he had any knowledge, were it ever so little, of the two languages, 
ventured upon the work of translation.</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 12. A diversity of interpretations is useful. Errors arising from ambiguous words" prev="xii_1" next="xiv_1" id="xiii_1">

<h3 id="xiii_1-p0.1">Chapter 12</h3>
<p class="par" id="xiii_1-p1">17. And this circumstance would assist rather than hinder the understanding of 
Scripture, if only readers were not careless. For the examination of a number 
of texts has often thrown light upon some of the more obscure passages; for 
example, in that passage of the prophet Isaiah, one translator reads: "And do 
not despise the domestics of thy seed;" another reads: "And do not despise 
thine own flesh." Each of these in turn confirms the other. For the one is 
explained by the other; because "flesh" may be taken in its literal sense, so 
that a man may understand that he is admonished not to despise his own body; 
and "the domestics of thy seed" may be understood figuratively of Christians, 
because they are spiritually born of the same seed as ourselves, namely, the 
Word. When now the meaning of the two translators is compared, a more likely 
sense of the words suggests itself, viz., that the command is not to despise 
our kinsmen, because when one brings the expression "domestics of thy seed " 
into relation with "flesh," kinsmen most naturally occur to one's mind. 
Whence, I think, that expression of the apostle, when he says, "If by any 
means I may provoke to emulation them which are my flesh, and might save some 
of them;" that is, that through emulation of those who had believed, some of 
them might believe too. And he calls the Jews his "flesh," on account of the 
relationship of blood. Again, that passage from the same prophet Isaiah: "If 
ye will not believe, ye shall not understand," another has translated: "If ye 
will not believe, ye shall not abide." Now which of these is the literal 
translation cannot be ascertained without reference to the text in the 
original tongue. And yet to those who read with knowledge, a great truth is to 
be found in each. For it is difficult for interpreters to differ so widely as 
not to touch at some point. Accordingly here, as understanding consists in 
sight, and is abiding, but faith feeds us as babes, upon milk, in the cradles 
of temporal things (for now we walk by faith, not by sight); as, moreover, 
unless we walk by faith, we shall not attain to sight, which does not pass 
away, but abides, our understanding being purified by holding to the 
truth;—for these reasons one says, "If ye will not believe, ye shall not 
understand;" but the other, "If ye will not believe, ye shall not abide."</p>

<p class="par" id="xiii_1-p2">18. And very often a translator, to whom the meaning is not well known, is 
deceived by an ambiguity in the original language, and puts upon the passage a 
construction that is wholly alien to the sense of the writer. As for example, 
some texts read: "Their feet are sharp to shed blood;" for the word "oxus" 
among the Greeks means both sharp and swift. And so he saw the true meaning 
who translated: "Their feet are swift to shed blood." The other, taking the 
wrong sense of an ambiguous word, fell into error. Now translations such as 
this are not obscure, but false; and there is a wide difference between the 
two things. For we must learn not to interpret, but to correct texts of this 
sort. For the same reason it is, that because the Greek word "moschos" means a 
calf, some have not understood that "moscheumata" are shoots of trees, and 
have translated the word "calves;" and this error has crept into so many 
texts, that you can hardly find it written in any other way. And yet the 
meaning is very clear; for it is made evident by the words that follow. For 
"the plantings of an adulterer will not take deep root," is a more suitable 
form of expression than the "calves;" because these walk upon the ground with 
their feet, and are not fixed in the earth by roots. In this passage, indeed, 
the rest of the context also justifies this translation.</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 13. How faulty interpretations can be emended" prev="xiii_1" next="xv_1" id="xiv_1">

<h3 id="xiv_1-p0.1">Chapter 13</h3>
<p class="par" id="xiv_1-p1">19. But since we do not clearly see what the actual thought is which the 
several translators endeavour to express, each according to his own ability 
and judgment, unless we examine it in the language which they translate; and 
since the translator, if he be not a very learned man, often departs from the 
meaning of his author, we must either endeavour to get a knowledge of those 
languages from which the Scriptures are translated into Latin, or we must get 
hold of the translations of those who keep rather close to the letter of the 
original, not because these are sufficient, but because we may use them to 
correct the freedom or the error of others, who in their translations have 
chosen to follow the sense quite as much as the words. For not only single 
words, but often whole phrases are translated, which could not be translated 
at all into the Latin idiom by any one who wished to hold by the usage of the 
ancients who spoke Latin. And though these sometimes do not interfere with the 
understanding of the passage, yet they are offensive to those who feel greater 
delight in things when even the signs of those things are kept in their own 
purity. For what is called a solecism is nothing else than the putting of 
words together according to a different rule from that which those of our 
predecessors who spoke with any authority followed. For whether we say inter 
homines (among men) or inter hominibus, is of no consequence to a man who only 
wishes to know the facts. And in the same way, what is a barbarism but the 
pronouncing of a word in a different way from that in which those who spoke 
Latin before us pronounced it? For whether the word <span lang="LA" style="font-style:italic" id="xiv_1-p1.1">ignoscere</span> (to 
pardon) should be pronounced with the third syllable long or short, is not a 
matter of much concern to the man who is beseeching God, in any way at all 
that he can get the words out, to pardon his sins. What then is purity of 
speech, except the preserving of the custom of language established by the 
authority of former speakers?</p>

<p class="par" id="xiv_1-p2">20. And men are easily offended in a matter of this kind, just in proportion 
as they are weak; and they are weak just in proportion as they wish to seem 
learned, not in the knowledge of things which tend to edification, but in that 
of signs, by which it is hard not to be puffed up, seeing that the knowledge 
of things even would often set up our neck, if it were not held down by the 
yoke of our Master. For how does it prevent our understanding it to have the 
following passage thus expressed: "<span lang="LA" style="font-style:italic" id="xiv_1-p2.1">Quae est terra in qua isti insidunt 
super eam, si bona est an nequam; et quae sunt civitates, in quibus ipsi 
inhabitant in ipsis?</span>" (And what the land is that they dwell in, whether it 
be good or bad: and what cities they be that they dwell in.—<scripRef passage="Numbers 13:19" id="xiv_1-p2.2" parsed="|Num|13|19|0|0" osisRef="Bible:Num.13.19">Num. 13:19</scripRef>) And I 
am more disposed to think that this is simply the idiom of another language 
than that any deeper meaning is intended. Again, that phrase, which we cannot 
now take away from the lips of the people who sing it: "<span lang="LA" style="font-style:italic" id="xiv_1-p2.3">Super ipsum autem 
floriet sanctificatio mea</span>" (But upon himself shall my holiness flourish—<scripRef passage="Psalm 132:18" id="xiv_1-p2.4" parsed="|Ps|132|18|0|0" osisRef="Bible:Ps.132.18">Ps.132:18</scripRef>), surely takes away nothing from the meaning. Yet a more learned man 
would prefer that this should be corrected, and that we should say, not 
<span lang="LA" id="xiv_1-p2.5">floriet</span>, but <span lang="LA" id="xiv_1-p2.6">florebit</span>. Nor does anything stand in the way of the correction 
being made, except the usage of the singers. Mistakes of this kind, then, if a 
man do not choose to avoid them altogether, it is easy to treat with 
indifference, as not interfering with a right understanding. But take, on the 
other hand, the saying of the apostle: "<span lang="LA" style="font-style:italic" id="xiv_1-p2.7">Quod stultum est Dei, sapientius 
est hominibus, et quod infirmum est Dei, fortius est hominibus"</span> (Because 
the foolishness of God is wiser than men, and the weakness of God is stronger 
than men—<scripRef passage="1 Corinthians 1:25" id="xiv_1-p2.8" parsed="|1Cor|1|25|0|0" osisRef="Bible:1Cor.1.25">1 Cor.1:25</scripRef>). If any one should retain in this passage the Greek 
idiom, and say, "<span lang="LA" style="font-style:italic" id="xiv_1-p2.9">Quod stultum est Dei, sapientius est hominum et quo 
infirmum est Dei fortius est hominum</span>" (What is foolish of God is wiser of 
men, and what is weak of God is stronger of men), a quick and careful reader 
would indeed by an effort attain to the true meaning, but still a man of 
slower intelligence either would not understand it at all, or would put an 
utterly false construction upon it. For not only is such a form of speech 
faulty in the Latin tongue, but it is ambiguous too, as if the meaning might 
be, that the folly of men or the weakness of men is wiser or stronger than 
that of God. But indeed even the expression "<span lang="LA" style="font-style:italic" id="xiv_1-p2.10">sapientius est 
hominibus</span>" (stronger than men) is not free from ambiguity, even though it 
be free from solecism. For whether "hominibus" is put as the plural of the 
dative or as the plural of the ablative, does not appear, unless by reference 
to the meaning. It would be better then to say, "<span lang="LA" style="font-style:italic" id="xiv_1-p2.11">sapientius est quam 
homines</span>", and "<span lang="LA" style="font-style:italic" id="xiv_1-p2.12">fortius est quam homines</span>".</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 14. How the meaning of unknown words and idioms is to be discovered" prev="xiv_1" next="xvi_1" id="xv_1">

<h3 id="xv_1-p0.1">Chapter 14</h3>
<p class="par" id="xv_1-p1">21. About ambiguous signs, however, I shall speak afterwards. I am treating at 
present of unknown signs, of which, as far as the words are concerned, there 
are two kinds. For either a word or an idiom, of which the reader is ignorant, 
brings him to a stop. Now if these belong to foreign tongues, we must either 
make inquiry about them from men who speak those tongues, or if we have 
leisure we must learn the tongues ourselves, or we must consult and compare 
several translators. If, however, there are words or idioms in our own tongue 
that we are unacquainted with, we gradually come to know them through being 
accustomed to read or to hear them. There is nothing that it is better to 
commit to memory than those kinds of words and phrases whose meaning we do not 
know, so that where we happen to meet either with a more learned man of whom 
we can inquire, or with a passage that shows, either by the preceding or 
succeeding context, or by both, the force and significance of the phrase we 
are ignorant of, we can easily by the help of our memory turn our attention to 
the matter and learn all about it. So great, however, is the force of custom, 
even in regard to learning, that those who have been in a sort of way nurtured 
and brought up on the study of Holy Scripture, are surprised at other forms of 
speech, and think them less pure Latin than those which they have learnt from 
Scripture, but which are not to be found in Latin authors. In this matter, 
too, the great number of the translators proves a very great assistance, if 
they are examined and discussed with a careful comparison of their texts. Only 
all positive error must be removed. For those who are anxious to know the 
Scriptures ought in the first place to use their skill in the correction of 
the texts, so that the uncorrected ones should give way to the corrected, at 
least when they are copies of the same translation.</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 15. Among versions a preference is given to the Septuagint and the Itala" prev="xv_1" next="xvii_1" id="xvi_1">

<h3 id="xvi_1-p0.1">Chapter 15</h3>
<p class="par" id="xvi_1-p1">22. Now among translations themselves the Italian (Itala) is to be preferred 
to the others, for it keeps closer to the words without prejudice to clearness 
of expression. And to correct the Latin we must use the Greek versions, among 
which the authority of the Septuagint is preeminent as far as the Old 
Testament is concerned; for it is reported through all the more learned 
churches that the seventy translators enjoyed so much of the presence and 
power of the Holy Spirit in their work of translation, that among that number 
of men there was but one voice. And if, as is reported, and as many not 
unworthy of confidence assert, they were separated during the work of 
translation, each man being in a cell by himself, and yet nothing was found in 
the manuscript of any one of them that was not found in the same words and in 
the same order of words in all the rest, who dares put anything in comparison 
with an authority like this, not to speak of preferring anything to it? And 
even if they conferred together with the result that a unanimous agreement 
sprang out of the common labour and judgment of them all; even so, it would 
not be right or becoming for any one man, whatever his experience, to aspire 
to correct the unanimous opinion of many venerable and learned men. Wherefore, 
even if anything is found in the original Hebrew in a different form from that 
in which these men have expressed it, I think we must give way to the 
dispensation of Providence which used these men to bring it about, that books 
which the Jewish race were unwilling, either from religious scruple or from 
jealousy, to make known to other nations, were, with the assistance of the 
power of King Ptolemy, made known so long beforehand to the nations which in 
the future were to believe in the Lord. And thus it is possible that they 
translated in such a way as the Holy Spirit, who worked in them and had given 
them all one voice, thought most suitable for the Gentiles. But nevertheless, 
as I said above, a comparison of those translators also who have kept most 
closely to the words, is often not without value as a help to the clearing up 
of the meaning. The Latin texts, therefore, of the Old Testament are, as I was 
about to say, to be corrected if necessary by the authority of the Greeks, and 
especially by that of those who, though they were seventy in number, are said 
to have translated as with one voice. As to the books of the New Testament, 
again, if any perplexity arises from the diversities of the Latin texts, we 
must of course yield to the Greek, especially those that are found in the 
churches of greater learning and research.</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 16. The knowledge both of language and things is helpful for the understanding of figurative expressions" prev="xvi_1" next="xviii_1" id="xvii_1">
<h3 id="xvii_1-p0.1">Chapter 16</h3>
<p class="par" id="xvii_1-p1">23. In the case of figurative signs, again, if ignorance of any of them should 
chance to bring the reader to a standstill, their meaning is to be traced 
partly by the knowledge of languages, partly by the knowledge of things. The 
pool of Siloam, for example, where the man whose eyes our Lord had anointed 
with clay made out of spittle was commanded to wash, has a figurative 
significance, and undoubtedly conveys a secret sense; but yet if the 
evangelist had not interpreted that name, a meaning so important would lie 
unnoticed. And we cannot doubt that, in the same way, many Hebrew names which 
have not been interpreted by the writers of those books, would, if any one 
could interpret them, be of great value and service in solving the enigmas of 
Scripture. And a number of men skilled in that language have conferred no 
small benefit on posterity by explaining all these words without reference to 
their place in Scripture, and telling us what Adam means, what Eve, what 
Abraham, what Moses, and also the names of places, what Jerusalem signifies, 
or Sion, or Sinai, or Lebanon, or Jordan, and whatever other names in that 
language we are not acquainted with. And when these names have been 
investigated and explained, many figurative expressions in Scripture become 
clear.</p>

<p class="par" id="xvii_1-p2">24. Ignorance of things, too, renders figurative expressions obscure, as when 
we do not know the nature of the animals, or minerals, or plants, which are 
frequently referred to in Scripture by way of comparison. The fact so well 
known about the serpent, for example, that to protect its head it will present 
its whole body to its assailants—how much light it throws upon the meaning of 
our Lord's command, that we should be wise as serpents; that is to say, that 
for the sake of our head, which is Christ, we should willingly offer our body 
to the persecutors, lest the Christian faith should, as it were, be destroyed 
in us, if to save the body we deny our God! Or again, the statement that the 
serpent gets rid of its old skin by squeezing itself through a narrow hole, 
and thus acquires new strength—how appropriately it fits in with the 
direction to imitate the wisdom of the serpent, and to put off the old man, as 
the apostle says, that we may put on the new; and to put it off, too, by 
coming through a narrow place, according to the saying of our Lord, "Enter ye 
in at the strait gate!" As, then, knowledge of the nature of the serpent 
throws light upon many metaphors which Scripture is accustomed to draw from 
that animal, so ignorance of other animals, which are no less frequently 
mentioned by way of comparison, is a very great drawback to the reader. And so 
in regard to minerals and plants: knowledge of the carbuncle, for instance, 
which shines in the dark, throws light upon many of the dark places in books 
too, where it is used metaphorically; and ignorance of the beryl or the 
adamant often shuts the doors of knowledge. And the only reason why we find it 
easy to understand that perpetual peace is indicated by the olive branch which 
the dove brought with it when it returned to the ark, is that we know both 
that the smooth touch of olive oil is not easily spoiled by a fluid of another 
kind, and that the tree itself is an evergreen. Many, again, by reason of 
their ignorance of hyssop, not knowing the virtue it has in cleansing the 
lungs, nor the power it is said to have of piercing rocks with its roots, 
although it is a small and insignificant plant, cannot make out why it is 
said, Purge me with hyssop, and I shall be clean".</p>

<p class="par" id="xvii_1-p3">25. Ignorance of numbers, too, prevents us from understanding things that are 
set down in Scripture in a figurative and mystical way. A candid mind, if I 
may so speak, cannot but be anxious, for example, to ascertain what is meant 
by the fact that Moses and Elijah, and our Lord Himself, all fasted for forty 
days. And except by knowledge of and reflection upon the number, the 
difficulty of explaining the figure involved in this action cannot be got 
over. For the number contains ten four times, indicating the knowledge of all 
things, and that knowledge interwoven with time. For both the diurnal and the 
annual revolutions are accomplished in periods numbering four each; the 
diurnal in the hours of the morning, the noontime, the evening, and the night; 
the annual in the spring, summer, autumn, and winter months. Now while we live 
in time, we must abstain and fast from all joy in time, for the sake of that 
eternity in which we wish to live; although by the passage of time we are 
taught this very lesson of despising time and seeking eternity. Further, the 
number ten signifies the knowledge of the Creator and the creature, for there 
is a trinity in the Creator; and the number seven indicates the creature, 
because of the life and the body. For the life consists of three parts, whence 
also God is to be loved with the whole heart, the whole soul, and the whole 
mind; and it is very clear that in the body there are four elements of which 
it is made up. In this number ten, therefore, when it is placed before us in 
connection with time, that is, when it is taken four times, we are admonished 
to live unstained by, and not partaking of, any delight in time, that is, to 
fast for forty days. Of this we are admonished by the law personified in 
Moses, by prophecy personified in Elijah, and by our Lord Himself, who, as if 
receiving the witness both of the law and the prophets, appeared on the mount 
between the other two, while His three disciples looked on in amazement. Next, 
we have to inquire in the same way, how out of the number forty springs the 
number fifty, which in our religion has no ordinary sacredness attached to it 
on account of the Pentecost, and how this number taken thrice on account of 
the three divisions of time, before the law, under the law, and under grace, 
or perhaps on account of the name of the Father, Son, and Holy Spirit, and the 
Trinity itself being added over and above, has reference to the mystery of the 
most Holy Church, and reaches to the number of the one hundred and fifty-three 
fishes which were taken after the resurrection of our Lord, when the nets were 
cast out on the right-hand side of the boat. And in the same way, many other 
numbers and combinations of numbers are used in the sacred writings, to convey 
instruction under a figurative guise, and ignorance of numbers often shuts out 
the reader from this instruction.</p>

<p class="par" id="xvii_1-p4">26. Not a few things, too, are closed against us and obscured by ignorance of 
music. One man, for example, has not unskilfully explained some metaphors from 
the difference between the psalters and the harp. And it is a question which 
it is not out of place for learned men to discuss, whether there is any 
musical law that compels the psalters of ten chords to have just so many 
strings; or whether, if there be no such law, the number itself is not on that 
very account the more to be considered as of sacred significance, either with 
reference to the ten commandments of the law (and if again any question is 
raised about that number, we can only refer it to the Creator and the 
creature), or with reference to the number ten itself as interpreted above. 
And the number of years the temple was in building, which is mentioned in the 
gospel—viz., forty-six—has a certain undefinable musical sound, and when 
referred to the structure of our Lord's body, in relation to which the temple 
was mentioned, compels many heretics to confess that our Lord put on, not a 
false, but a true and human body. And in several places in the Holy Scriptures 
we find both numbers and music mentioned with honour.</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 17. Origin of the legend of the nine Muses" prev="xvii_1" next="xix_1" id="xviii_1">

<h3 id="xviii_1-p0.1">Chapter 17</h3>
<p class="par" id="xviii_1-p1">27. For we must not listen to the falsities of heathen superstition, which 
represent the nine Muses as daughters of Jupiter and Mercury. Varro refutes 
these, and I doubt whether any one can be found among them more curious or 
more learned in such matters. He says that a certain state (I don't recollect 
the name) ordered from each of three artists a set of statues of the Muses, to 
be placed as an offering in the temple of Apollo, intending that whichever of 
the artists produced the most beautiful statues, they should select and 
purchase from him. It so happened that these artists executed their works with 
equal beauty, that all nine pleased the state, and that all were bought to be 
dedicated in the temple of Apollo; and he says that afterwards Hesiod the poet 
gave names to them all. It was not Jupiter, therefore, that begat the nine 
Muses, but three artists created three each. And the state had originally 
given the order for three, not because it had seen them in visions, nor 
because they had presented themselves in that number to the eyes of any of the 
citizens, but because it was obvious to remark that all sound, which is the 
material of song, is by nature of three kinds. For it is either produced by 
the voice, as in the case of those who sing with the mouth without an 
instrument; or by blowing, as in the case of trumpets and flutes; or by 
striking, as in the case of harps and drums, and all other instruments that 
give their sound when struck.</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 18. No help is to be despised even though it come from a profane source" prev="xviii_1" next="xx_1" id="xix_1">

<h3 id="xix_1-p0.1">Chapter 18</h3>
<p class="par" id="xix_1-p1">28. But whether the fact is as Varro has related, or is not so, still we ought 
not to give up music because of the superstition of the heathen, if we can 
derive anything from it that is of use for the understanding of Holy 
Scripture; nor does it follow that we must busy ourselves with their 
theatrical trumpery because we enter upon an investigation about harps and 
other instruments, that may help us to lay hold upon spiritual things. For we 
ought not to refuse to learn letters because they say that Mercury discovered 
them; nor because they have dedicated temples to Justice and Virtue, and 
prefer to worship in the form of stones things that ought to have their place 
in the heart, ought we on that account to forsake justice and virtue. Nay, but 
let every good and true Christian understand that wherever truth may be found, 
it belongs to his Master; and while he recognizes and acknowledges the truth, 
even in their religious literature, let him reject the figments of 
superstition, and let him grieve over and avoid men who, "when they knew God, 
glorified him not as God, neither were thankful; but became vain in their 
imaginations, and their foolish heart was darkened. Professing themselves to 
be wise, they became fools, and changed the glory of the incorruptible God 
into an image made like to corruptible man, and to birds, and four-footed 
beasts, and creeping things."</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 19. Two kinds of heathen knowledge" prev="xix_1" next="xxi_1" id="xx_1">

<h3 id="xx_1-p0.1">Chapter 19</h3>
<p class="par" id="xx_1-p1">29. But to explain more fully this whole topic (for it is one that cannot be 
omitted), there are two kinds of knowledge which are in vogue among the 
heathen. One is the knowledge of things instituted by men, the other of things 
which they have noted, either as transacted in the past or as instituted by 
God. The former kind, that which deals with human institutions, is partly 
superstitious, partly not.</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 20. The superstitious nature of human institutions" prev="xx_1" next="xxii_1" id="xxi_1">

<h3 id="xxi_1-p0.1">Chapter 20</h3>
<p class="par" id="xxi_1-p1">30. All the arrangements made by men to the making and worshipping of idols 
are superstitious, pertaining as they do either to the worship of what is 
created or of some part of it as God, or to consultations and arrangements 
about signs and leagues with devils, such, for example, as are employed in the 
magical arts, and which the poets are accustomed not so much to teach as to 
celebrate. And to this class belong, but with a bolder reach of deception, the 
books of the haruspices and augurs. In this class we must place also all 
amulets and cures which the medical art condemns, whether these consist in 
incantations, or in marks which they call characters, or in hanging or tying 
on or even dancing in a fashion certain articles, not with reference to the 
condition of the body, but to certain signs hidden or manifest; and these 
remedies they call by the less offensive name of physica, so as to appear not 
to be engaged in superstitious observances, but to be taking advantage of the 
forces of nature. Examples of these are the earrings on the top of each ear, 
or the rings of ostrich bone on the fingers, or telling you when you hiccup to 
hold your left thumb in your right hand.</p>

<p class="par" id="xxi_1-p2">31. To these we may add thousands of the most frivolous practices, that are to 
be observed if any part of the body should jump, or if, when friends are 
walking arm-in-arm, a stone, or a dog, or a boy, should come between them. And 
the kicking of a stone, as if it were a divider of friends, does less harm 
than to cuff an innocent boy if he happens to run between men who are walking 
side by side. But it is delightful that the boys are sometimes avenged by the 
dogs; for frequently men are so superstitious as to venture upon striking a 
dog who has run between them,—not with impunity however, for instead of a 
superstitious remedy, the dog sometimes makes his assailant run in hot haste 
for a real surgeon. To this class, too, belong the following rules: To tread 
upon the threshold when you go out in front of the house; to go back to bed if 
any one should sneeze when you are putting on your slippers; to return home if 
you stumble when going to a place; when your clothes are eaten by mice, to be 
more frightened at the prospect of coming misfortune than grieved by your 
present loss. Whence that witty saying of Cato, who, when consulted by a man 
who told him that the mice had eaten his boots, replied, "That is not strange, 
but it would have been very strange indeed if the boots had eaten the mice."</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 21. Superstition of astrologers" prev="xxi_1" next="xxiii_1" id="xxii_1">
<h3 id="xxii_1-p0.1">Chapter 21</h3>
<p class="par" id="xxii_1-p1">32. Nor can we exclude from this kind of superstition those who were called 
<span lang="LA" id="xxii_1-p1.1">genethliaci</span>, on account of their attention to birthdays, but are now commonly 
called <span lang="LA" id="xxii_1-p1.2">mathematici</span>. For these, too, although they may seek with pains for the 
true position of the stars at the time of our birth, and may sometimes even 
find it out, yet in so far as they attempt thence to predict our actions, or 
the consequences of our actions, grievously err, and sell inexperienced men 
into a miserable bondage. For when any freeman goes to an astrologer of this 
kind, he gives money that he may come away the slave either of Mars or of 
Venus, or rather, perhaps, of all the stars to which those who first fell into 
this error, and handed it on to posterity, have given the names either of 
beasts on account of their likeness to beasts, or of men with a view to confer 
honour on those men. And this is not to be wondered at, when we consider that 
even in times more recent and nearer our own, the Romans made an attempt to 
dedicate the star which we call Lucifer to the name and honour of Caesar. And 
this would, perhaps, have been done, and the name handed down to distant ages, 
only that his ancestress Venus had given her name to this star before him, and 
could not by any law transfer to her heirs what she had never possessed, nor 
sought to possess, in life. For where a place was vacant, or not held in 
honour of any of the dead of former times, the usual proceeding in such cases 
was carried out. For example, we have changed the names of the months 
Quintilis and Sextilis to July and August, naming them in honour of the men 
Julius Caesar and Augustus Caesar; and from this instance any one who cares 
can easily see that the stars spoken of above formerly wandered in the heavens 
without the names they now bear. But as the men were dead whose memory people 
were either compelled by royal power or impelled by human folly to honour, 
they seemed to think that in putting their names upon the stars they were 
raising the dead men themselves to heaven. But whatever they may be called by 
men, still there are stars which God has made and set in order after His own 
pleasure, and they have a fixed movement, by which the seasons are 
distinguished and varied. And when any one is born, it is easy to observe the 
point at which this movement has arrived, by use of the rules discovered and 
laid down by those who are rebuked by Holy Writ in these terms: "For if they 
were able to know so much that they could weigh the world, how did they not 
more easily find out the Lord thereof?"</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 22. The folly of observing the stars in order to predict  the events of a life" prev="xxii_1" next="xxiv_1" id="xxiii_1">
<h3 id="xxiii_1-p0.1">Chapter 22</h3>
<p class="par" id="xxiii_1-p1">33. But to desire to predict the characters, the acts, and the fate of those 
who are born from such an observation, is a great delusion and great madness. 
And among those at least who have any sort of acquaintance with matters of 
this kind (which, indeed, are only fit to be unlearnt again), this 
superstition is refuted beyond the reach of doubt. For the observation is of 
the position of the stars, which they call constellations, at the time when 
the person was born about whom these wretched men are consulted by their still 
more wretched dupes. Now it may happen that, in the case of twins, one follows 
the other out of the womb so closely that there is no interval of time between 
them that can be apprehended and marked in the position of the constellations. 
Whence it necessarily follows that twins are in many cases born under the same 
stars, while they do not meet with equal fortune either in what they do or 
what they suffer, but often meet with fates so different that one of them has 
a most fortunate life, the other a most unfortunate. As, for example, we are 
told that Esau and Jacob were born twins, and in such close succession, that 
Jacob, who was born last, was found to have laid hold with his hand upon the 
heel of his brother, who preceded him. Now, assuredly, the day and hour of the 
birth of these two could not be marked in any way that would not give both the 
same constellation. But what a difference there was between the characters, 
the actions, the labours, and the fortunes of these two, the Scriptures bear 
witness, which are now so widely spread as to be in the mouth of all nations.</p>

<p class="par" id="xxiii_1-p2">34. Nor is it to the point to say that the very smallest and briefest moment 
of time that separates the birth of twins, produces great effects in nature, 
and in the extremely rapid motion of the heavenly bodies. For, although I may 
grant that it does produce the greatest effects, yet the astrologer cannot 
discover this in the constellations, and it is by looking into these that he 
professes to read the fates. If, then, he does not discover the difference 
when he examines the constellations, which must, of course, be the same 
whether he is consulted about Jacob or his brother, what does it profit him 
that there is a difference in the heavens, which he rashly and carelessly 
brings into disrepute, when there is no difference in his chart, which he 
looks into anxiously but in vain? And so these notions also, which have their 
origin in certain signs of things being arbitrarily fixed upon by the 
presumption of men, are to be referred to the same class as if they were 
leagues and covenants with devils.</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 23. Why we repudiate arts of divination" prev="xxiii_1" next="xxv_1" id="xxiv_1">

<h3 id="xxiv_1-p0.1">Chapter 23</h3>
<p class="par" id="xxiv_1-p1">35. For in this way it comes to pass that men who lust after evil things are, 
by a secret judgment of God, delivered over to be mocked and deceived, as the 
just reward of their evil desires. For they are deluded and imposed on by the 
false angels, to whom the lowest part of the world has been put in subjection 
by the law of God's providence, and in accordance with His most admirable 
arrangement of things. And the result of these delusions and deceptions is, 
that through these superstitious and baneful modes of divination, many things 
in the past and future are made known, and turn out just as they are foretold; 
and in the case of those who practice superstitious observances, many things 
turn out agreeably to their observances, and ensnared by these successes, they 
become more eagerly inquisitive, and involve themselves further and further in 
a labyrinth of most pernicious error. And to our advantage, the Word of God is 
not silent about this species of fornication of the soul; and it does not warn 
the soul against following such practices on the ground that those who profess 
them speak lies, but it says, "Even if what they tell you should come to pass, 
hearken not unto them." For though the ghost of the dead Samuel foretold the 
truth to King Saul, that does not make such sacrilegious observances as those 
by which his ghost was brought up the less detestable; and though the 
ventriloquist woman in the Acts of the Apostles bore true testimony to the 
apostles of the Lord, the Apostle Paul did not spare the evil spirit on that 
account, but rebuked and cast it out, and so made the woman clean.</p>

<p class="par" id="xxiv_1-p2">36. All arts of this sort, therefore, are either nullities, or are part of a 
guilty superstition, springing out of a baleful fellowship between men and 
devils, and are to be utterly repudiated and avoided by the Christian as the 
covenants of a false and treacherous friendship. Not as if the idol were 
anything," says the apostle; "but because the things which they sacrifice they 
sacrifice to devils and not to God; and I would not that ye should have 
fellowship with devils." Now what the apostle has said about idols and the 
sacrifices offered in their honour, that we ought to feel in regard to all 
fancied signs which lead either to the worship of idols, or to worshipping 
creation or its parts instead of God, or which are connected with attention to 
medicinal charms and other observances; for these are not appointed by God as 
the public means of promoting love towards God and our neighbour, but they 
waste the hearts of wretched men in private and selfish strivings after 
temporal things. Accordingly, in regard to all these branches of knowledge, we 
must fear and shun the fellowship of demons, who, with the Devil their prince, 
strive only to shut and bar the door against our return. As, then, from the 
stars which God created and ordained, men have drawn lying omens of their own 
fancy, so also from things that are born, or in any other way come into 
existence under the government of God's providence, if there chance only to be 
something unusual in the occurrence,—as when a mule brings forth young, or an 
object is struck by lightning,—men have frequently drawn omens by conjectures 
of their own, and have committed them to writing, as if they had drawn them by 
rule.</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 24. The intercourse and agreement with demons which superstitious observances maintain" prev="xxiv_1" next="xxvi_1" id="xxv_1">

<h3 id="xxv_1-p0.1">Chapter 24</h3>
<p class="par" id="xxv_1-p1">37. And all these omens are of force just so far as has been arranged with the 
devils by that previous understanding in the mind which is, as it were, the 
common language, but they are all full of hurtful curiosity, torturing 
anxiety, and deadly slavery. For it was not because they had meaning that they 
were attended to, but it was by attending to and marking them that they came 
to have meaning. And so they are made different for different people, 
according to their several notions and prejudices. For those spirits which are 
bent upon deceiving, take care to provide for each person the same sort of 
omens as they see his own conjectures and preconceptions have already 
entangled him in. For, to take an illustration, the same figure of the letter 
X, which is made in the shape of a cross, means one thing among the Greeks and 
another among the Latins, not by nature, but by agreement and prearrangement 
as to its signification; and so, any one who knows both languages uses this 
letter in a different sense when writing to a Greek from that in which he uses 
it when writing to a Latin. And the same sound, beta, which is the name of a 
letter among the Greeks, is the name of a vegetable among the Latins; and when 
I say, lege, these two syllables mean one thing to a Greek and another to a 
Latin. Now, just as all these signs affect the mind according to the 
arrangements of the community in which each man lives, and affect different 
men's minds differently, because these arrangements are different; and as, 
further, men did not agree upon them as signs because they were already 
significant, but on the contrary they are now significant because men have 
agreed upon them; in the same way also, those signs by which the ruinous 
intercourse with devils is maintained have meaning just in proportion to each 
man's observations. And this appears quite plainly in the rites of the augurs; 
for they, both before they observe the omens and after they have completed 
their observations, take pains not to see the flight or hear the cries of 
birds, because these omens are of no significance apart from the previous 
arrangement in the mind of the observer.</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 25. In human institutions which are not superstitious,  there are some things superfluous and some convenient and necessary" prev="xxv_1" next="xxvii_1" id="xxvi_1">

<h3 id="xxvi_1-p0.1">Chapter 25</h3>
<p class="par" id="xxvi_1-p1">38. But when all these have been cut away and rooted out of the mind of the 
Christian, we must then look at human institutions which are not 
superstitious, that is, such as are not set up in association with devils, but 
by men in association with one another. For all arrangements that are in force 
among men, because they have agreed among themselves that they should be in 
force, are human institutions; and of these, some are matters of superfluity 
and luxury, some of convenience and necessity. For if those signs which the 
actors make in dancing were of force by nature, and not by the arrangement and 
agreement of men, the public crier would not in former times have announced to 
the people of Carthage, while the pantomime was dancing, what it was he meant 
to express,—a thing still remembered by many old men from whom we have 
frequently heard it. And we may well believe this, because even now, if any 
one who is unaccustomed to such follies goes into the theatre, unless some one 
tells him what these movements mean, he will give his whole attention to them 
in vain. Yet all men aim at a certain degree of likeness in their choice of 
signs, that the signs may as far as possible be like the things they signify. 
But because one thing may resemble another in many ways, such signs are not 
always of the same significance among men, except when they have mutually 
agreed upon them.</p>

<p class="par" id="xxvi_1-p2">39. But in regard to pictures and statues, and other works of this kind, which 
are intended as representations of things, nobody makes a mistake, especially 
if they are executed by skilled artists, but every one, as soon as he sees the 
likenesses recognizes the things they are likenesses of. And this whole class 
are to be reckoned among the superfluous devices of men, unless when it is a 
matter of importance to inquire in regard to any of them, for what reason, 
where, when, and by whose authority it was made. Finally, the thousands of 
fables and fictions, in whose lies men take delight, are human devices, and 
nothing is to be considered more peculiarly man's own and derived from himself 
than, anything that is false and lying. Among the convenient and necessary 
arrangements of men with men are to be reckoned whatever differences they 
choose to make in bodily dress and ornament for the purpose of distinguishing 
sex or rank; and the countless varieties of signs without which human 
intercourse either could not be carried on at all, or would be carried on at 
great inconvenience; and the arrangements as to weights and measures, and the 
stamping and weighing of coins, which are peculiar to each state and 
people, and other things of the same kind. Now these, if they were not devices 
of men, would not be different in different nations, and could not be changed 
among particular nations at the discretion of their respective sovereigns.</p>

<p class="par" id="xxvi_1-p3">40. This whole class of human arrangements, which are of convenience for the 
necessary intercourse of life, the Christian is not by any means to neglect, 
but on the contrary should pay a sufficient degree of attention to them, and 
keep them in memory.</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 26. What human contrivances we are to adopt, and what we are to avoid" prev="xxvi_1" next="xxviii_1" id="xxvii_1">
<h3 id="xxvii_1-p0.1">Chapter 26</h3>
<p class="Body" id="xxvii_1-p1">For certain institutions of men are in a sort of way representations and 
likenesses of natural objects. And of these, such as have relation to 
fellowship with devils must, as has been said, be utterly rejected and held in 
detestation; those, on the other hand, which relate to the mutual intercourse 
of men, are, so far as they are not matters of luxury and superfluity, to be 
adopted, especially the forms of the letters which are necessary for reading, 
and the various languages as far as is required—a matter I have spoken of 
above. To this class also belong shorthand characters, those who are 
acquainted with which are called shorthand writers. All these are useful, and 
there is nothing unlawful in learning them, nor do they involve us in 
superstition, or enervate us by luxury, if they only occupy our minds so far 
as not to stand in the way of more important objects to which they ought to be 
subservient.</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 27. Some departments of knowledge, not of mere human invention, aid us in interpreting Scripture" prev="xxvii_1" next="xxix_1" id="xxviii_1">

<h3 id="xxviii_1-p0.1">Chapter 27</h3>
<p class="par" id="xxviii_1-p1">41. But, coming to the next point, we are not to reckon among human 
institutions those things which men have handed down to us, not as 
arrangements of their own, but as the resell of investigation into the 
occurrences of the past, and into the arrangements of God's providence. And of 
these, some pertain to the bodily senses, some to the intellect. Those which 
are reached by the bodily senses we either believe on testimony, or perceive 
when they are pointed out to us, or infer from experience.</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 28. To what extent history is an aid" prev="xxviii_1" next="xxx_1" id="xxix_1">

<h3 id="xxix_1-p0.1">Chapter 28</h3>
<p class="par" id="xxix_1-p1">42. Anything, then, that we learn from history about the chronology of past 
times assists us very much in understanding the Scriptures, even if it be 
learnt without the pale of the Church as a matter of childish instruction. For 
we frequently seek information about a variety of matters by use of the 
Olympiads, and the names of the consuls; and ignorance of the consulship in 
which our Lord was born, and that in which He suffered, has led some into the 
error of supposing that He was forty-six years of age when He suffered, that 
being the number of years He was told by the Jews the temple (which He took as 
a symbol of His body) was in building. Now we know on the authority of the 
evangelist that He was about thirty years of age when He was baptized; but the 
number of years He lived afterwards, although by putting His actions together 
we can make it out, yet that no shadow of doubt might arise from another 
source, can be ascertained more clearly and more certainly from a comparison 
of profane history with the gospel. It will still be evident, however, that it 
was not without a purpose it was said that the temple was forty and six years 
in building; so that, as this cannot be referred to our Lord's age, it may be 
referred to the more secret formation of the body which, for our sakes, the 
only begotten Son of God, by whom all things were made, condescended to put 
on.</p>

<p class="par" id="xxix_1-p2">43. As to the utility of history, moreover, passing over the Greeks, what a 
great question our own Ambrose has set at rest! For, when the readers and 
admirers of Plato dared calumniously to assert that our Lord Jesus Christ 
learnt all those sayings of His, which they are compelled to admire and 
praise, from the books of Plato—because (they urged) it cannot be denied that 
Plato lived long before the coming of our Lord!—did not the illustrious 
bishop, when by his investigations into profane history he had discovered that 
Plato made a journey into Egypt at the time when Jeremiah the prophet was 
there, show that it is much more likely that Plato was through Jeremiah's 
means initiated into our literature, so as to be able to teach and write those 
views of his which are so justly praised? For not even Pythagoras himself, 
from whose successors these men assert Plato learnt theology, lived at a date 
prior to the books of that Hebrew race, among whom the worship of one God 
sprang up, and of whom as concerning the flesh our Lord came. And thus, when 
we reflect upon the dates, it becomes much more probable that those 
philosophers learnt whatever they said that was good and true from our 
literature, than that the Lord Jesus Christ learnt from the writings of 
Plato,—a thing which it is the height of folly to believe.</p>

<p class="par" id="xxix_1-p3">44. And even when in the course of an historical narrative former institutions 
of men are described, the history itself is not to be reckoned among human 
institutions; because things that are past and gone and cannot be undone are 
to be reckoned as belonging to the course of time, of which God is the author 
and governor. For it is one thing to tell what has been done, another to show 
what ought to be done. History narrates what has been done, faithfully and 
with advantage; but the books of the haruspices, and all writings of the same 
kind, aim at teaching what ought to be done or observed, using the boldness of 
an adviser, not the fidelity of a narrator.</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 29. To what extent natural science is an exegetical aid" prev="xxix_1" next="xxxi_1" id="xxx_1">

<h3 id="xxx_1-p0.1">Chapter 29</h3>
<p class="par" id="xxx_1-p1">45. There is also a species of narrative resembling description, in which not 
a past but an existing state of things is made known to those who are ignorant 
of it. To this species belongs all that has been written about the situation 
of places, and the nature of animals, trees, herbs, stones, and other bodies. 
And of this species I have treated above, and have shown that this kind of 
knowledge is serviceable in solving the difficulties of Scripture, not that 
these objects are to be used conformably to certain signs as nostrums or the 
instruments of superstition; for that kind of knowledge I have already set 
aside as distinct from the lawful and free kind now spoken of. For it is one 
thing to say: If you bruise down this herb and drink it, it will remove the 
pain from your stomach; and another to say: If you hang this herb round your 
neck, it will remove the pain from your stomach. In the former case the 
wholesome mixture is approved of, in the latter the superstitious charm is 
condemned; although indeed, where incantations and invocations and marks are 
not used, it is frequently doubtful whether the thing that is tied or fixed in 
any way to the body to cure it, acts by a natural virtue, in which case it may 
be freely used; or acts by a sort of charm, in which case it becomes the 
Christian to avoid it the more carefully, the more efficacious it may seem to 
be. But when the reason why a thing is of virtue does not appear, the 
intention with which it is used is of great importance, at least in healing or 
in tempering bodies, whether in medicine or in agriculture.</p>

<p class="par" id="xxx_1-p2">46. The knowledge of the stars, again, is not a matter of narration, but of 
description. Very few of these, however, are mentioned in Scripture. And as 
the course of the moon, which is regularly employed in reference to 
celebrating the anniversary of our Lord's passion, is known to most people; so 
the rising and setting and other movements of the rest of the heavenly bodies 
are thoroughly known to very few. And this knowledge, although in itself it 
involves no superstition, renders very little, indeed almost no assistance, in 
the interpretation of Holy Scripture, and by engaging the attention 
unprofitably is a hindrance rather; and as it is closely related to the very 
pernicious error of the diviners of the fates, it is more convenient and 
becoming to neglect it. it involves, moreover, in addition to a description of 
the present state of things, something like a narrative of the past also; 
because one may go back from the present position and motion of the stars, and 
trace by rule their past movements. It involves also regular anticipations of 
the future, not in the way of forebodings and omens, but by way of sure 
calculation; not with the design of drawing any information from them as to 
our own acts and fates, in the absurd fashion of the <span lang="LA" id="xxx_1-p2.1">genethliaci</span>, but only as 
to the motions of the heavenly bodies themselves. For, as the man who computes 
the moon's age can tell, when he has found out her age today, what her age was 
any number of years ago, or what will be her age any number of years hence, in 
just the same way men who are skilled in such computations are accustomed to 
answer like questions about every one of the heavenly bodies. And I have 
stated what my views are about all this knowledge, so far as regards its 
utility.</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 30. What the mechanical arts contribute to exegetics" prev="xxx_1" next="xxxii_1" id="xxxi_1">

<h3 id="xxxi_1-p0.1">Chapter 30</h3>
<p class="par" id="xxxi_1-p1">47. Further, as to the remaining arts, whether those by which something is 
made which, when the effort of the workman is over, remains as a result of his 
work, as, for example, a house, a bench, a dish, and other things of that 
kind; or those which, so to speak, assist God in His operations, as medicine, 
and agriculture, and navigation: or those whose sole result is an action, as 
dancing, and racing, and wrestling;—in all these arts experience teaches us 
to infer the future from the past. For no man who is skilled in any of these 
arts moves his limbs in any operation without connecting the memory of the 
past with the expectation of the future. Now of these arts a very superficial 
and cursory knowledge is to be acquired, not with a view to practicing them 
(unless some duty compel us, a matter on which I do not touch at present), but 
with a view to forming a judgement about them, that we may not be wholly 
ignorant of what Scripture means to convey when it employs figures of speech 
derived from these arts.</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 31. Use of dialectics. Of fallacies" prev="xxxi_1" next="xxxiii_1" id="xxxii_1">

<h3 id="xxxii_1-p0.1">Chapter 31</h3>
<p class="par" id="xxxii_1-p1">48. There remain those branches of knowledge which pertain not to the bodily 
senses, but to the intellect, among which the science of reasoning and that of 
number are the chief. The science of reasoning is of very great service in 
searching into and unravelling all sorts of questions that come up in 
Scripture, only in the use of it we must guard against the love of wrangling, 
and the childish vanity of entrapping an adversary. For there are many of what 
are called sophisms, inferences in reasoning that are false, and yet so close 
an imitation of the true, as to deceive not only dull people, but clever men 
too, when they are not on their guard. For example, one man lays before 
another with whom he is talking, the proposition, "What I am, you are not." 
The other assents, for the proposition is in part true, the one man being 
cunning and the other simple. Then the first speaker adds: "I am a man;" and 
when the other has given his assent to this also, the first draws his 
conclusion: "Then you are not a man." Now at this sort of ensnaring arguments, 
Scripture, as I judge, expresses detestation in that place where it is said, 
"There is one that showeth wisdom in words, and is hated;" although, indeed, a 
style of speech which is not intended to entrap, but only aims at verbal 
ornamentation more than is consistent with seriousness of purpose, is also 
called sophistical.</p>

<p class="par" id="xxxii_1-p2">49. There are also valid processes of reasoning which lead to false 
conclusions, by following out to its logical consequences the error of the man 
with whom one is arguing; and these conclusions are sometimes drawn by a good 
and learned man, with the object of making the person from whose error these 
consequences result, feel ashamed of them, and of thus leading him to give up 
his error, when he finds that if he wishes to retain his old opinion, he must 
of necessity also hold other opinions which he condemns. For example, the 
apostle did not draw true conclusions when he said, "Then is Christ not 
risen," and again, "Then is our preaching vain, and your faith is also vain;" 
and further on drew other inferences which are all utterly false; for Christ 
has risen, the preaching of those who declared this fact was not in vain, nor 
was their faith in vain who had believed it. But all these false inferences 
followed legitimately from the opinion of those who said that there is no 
resurrection of the dead. These inferences, then, being repudiated as false, 
it follows that since they would be true if the dead rise not, there will be a 
resurrection of the dead. As, then, valid conclusions may be drawn not only 
from true but from false propositions, the laws of valid reasoning may easily 
be learnt in the schools, outside the pale of the Church. But the truth of 
propositions must be inquired into in the sacred books of the Church.</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 32. Valid logical sequence is not devised but only observed by man" prev="xxxii_1" next="xxxiv_1" id="xxxiii_1">

<h3 id="xxxiii_1-p0.1">Chapter 32</h3>
<p class="par" id="xxxiii_1-p1">50. And yet the validity of logical sequences is not a thing devised by men, 
but is observed and noted by them that they may be able to learn and teach it; 
for it exists eternally in the reason of things, and has its origin with God. 
For as the man who narrates the order of events does not himself create that 
order; and as he who describes the situations of places, or the natures of 
animals, or roots, or minerals, does not describe arrangements of man; and as 
he who points out the stars and their movements does not point out anything 
that he himself or any other man has ordained;—in the same way, he who says, 
"When the consequent is false, the antecedent must also be false," says what 
is most true; but he does not himself make it so, he only points out that it 
is so. And it is upon this rule that the reasoning I have quoted from the 
Apostle Paul proceeds. For the antecedent is, "There is no resurrection of the 
dead," the position taken up by those whose error the apostle wished to 
overthrow. Next, from this antecedent, the assertion, viz., that there is no 
resurrection of the dead, the necessary consequence is, "Then Christ is not 
risen." But this consequence is false, for Christ has risen; therefore the 
antecedent is also false. But the antecedent is, that there is no resurrection 
of the dead. We conclude, therefore, that there is a resurrection of the dead. 
Now all this is briefly expressed thus: If there is no resurrection of the 
dead, then is Christ not risen; but Christ is risen, therefore there is a 
resurrection of the dead. This rule, then, that when the consequent is 
removed, the antecedent must also be removed, is not made by man, but only 
pointed out by him. And this rule has reference to the validity of the 
reasoning, not to the truth of the statements.</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 33. False inferences may be drawn from valid seasonings, and vice versa" prev="xxxiii_1" next="xxxv_1" id="xxxiv_1">

<h3 id="xxxiv_1-p0.1">Chapter 33</h3>
<p class="par" id="xxxiv_1-p1">51. In this passage, however, where the argument is about the resurrection, 
both the law of the inference is valid, and the conclusion arrived at is true. 
But in the case of false conclusions, too, there is a validity of inference in 
some such way as the following. Let us suppose some man to have admitted: If a 
snail is an animal, it has a voice. This being admitted, then, when it has 
been proved that the snail has no voice, it follows (since when the consequent 
is proved false, the antecedent is also false) that the snail is not an 
animal. Now this conclusion is false, but it is a true and valid inference 
from the false admission. Thus, the truth of a statement stands on its own 
merits; the validity of an inference depends on the statement or the admission 
of the man with whom one is arguing. And thus, as I said above, a false 
inference may be drawn by a valid process of reasoning, in order that he whose 
error we wish to correct may be sorry that he has admitted the antecedent, 
when he sees that its logical consequences are utterly untenable. And hence it 
is easy to understand that as the inferences may be valid where the opinions 
are false, so the inferences may be unsound where the opinions are true. For 
example, suppose that a man propounds the statement, "If this man is just, he 
is good," and we admit its truth. Then he adds, "But he is not just;" and when 
we admit this too, he draws the conclusion, "Therefore he is not good." Now 
although every one of these statements may be true, still the principle of the 
inference is unsound. For it is not true that, as when the consequent is 
proved false the antecedent is also false, so when the antecedent is proved 
false the consequent is false. For the statement is true, "If he is an orator, 
he is a man." But if we add, "He is not an orator," the consequence does not 
follow, "He is not a man."</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 34. It is one thing to know the laws of inference, another to know the truth of opinions" prev="xxxiv_1" next="xxxvi_1" id="xxxv_1">

<h3 id="xxxv_1-p0.1">Chapter 34</h3>
<p class="par" id="xxxv_1-p1">52. Therefore it is one thing to know the laws of inference, and another to 
know the truth of opinions. In the former case we learn what is consequent, 
what is inconsequent, and what is incompatible. An example of a consequent is, 
"If he is an orator, he is a man;" of an inconsequent, "If he is a man, he is 
an orator;" of an incompatible, "If he is a man, he is a quadruped." In these 
instances we judge of the connection. In regard to the truth of opinions, 
however, we must consider propositions as they stand by themselves, and not in 
their connection with one another; but when propositions that we are not sure 
about are joined by a valid inference to propositions that are true and 
certain, they themselves, too, necessarily become certain. Now some, when they 
have ascertained the validity of the inference, plume themselves as if this 
involved also the truth of the propositions. Many, again, who hold the true 
opinions have an unfounded contempt for themselves, because they are ignorant 
of the laws of inference; whereas the man who knows that there is a 
resurrection of the dead is assuredly better than the man who only knows that 
it follows that if there is no resurrection of the dead, then is Christ not 
risen.</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 35. The science of definition is not false, though it may be applied to falsities" prev="xxxv_1" next="xxxvii_1" id="xxxvi_1">

<h3 id="xxxvi_1-p0.1">Chapter 35</h3>
<p class="par" id="xxxvi_1-p1">53. Again, the science of definition, of division, and of partition, although 
it is frequently applied to falsities, is not itself false, nor framed by 
man's device, but is evolved from the reason of things. For although poets 
have applied it to their fictions, and false philosophers, or even 
heretics—that is, false Christians—to their erroneous doctrines, that is no 
reason why it should be false, for example, that neither in definition, nor in 
division, nor in partition, is anything to be included that does not pertain 
to the matter in hand, nor anything to be omitted that does. This is true, 
even though the things to be defined or divided are not true. For even 
falsehood itself is defined when we say that falsehood is the declaration of a 
state of things which is not as we declare it to be; and this definition is 
true, although falsehood itself cannot be true. We can also divide it, saying 
that there are two kinds of falsehood, one in regard to things that cannot be 
true at all, the other in regard to things that are not, though it is possible 
they might be, true. For example, the man who says that seven and three are 
eleven, says what cannot be true under any circumstances; but he who says that 
it rained on the kalends of January, although perhaps the fact is not so, says 
what possibly might have been. The definition and division, therefore, of what 
is false may be perfectly true, although what is false cannot, of course, 
itself be true.</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 36. The rules of eloquence are true, though sometimes  used to persuade men of what is false" prev="xxxvi_1" next="xxxviii_1" id="xxxvii_1">

<h3 id="xxxvii_1-p0.1">Chapter 36</h3>
<p class="par" id="xxxvii_1-p1">54. There are also certain rules for a more copious kind of argument, which is 
called eloquence, and these rules are not the less true that they can be used 
for persuading men of what is false; but as they can be used to enforce the 
truth as well, it is not the faculty itself that is to be blamed, but the 
perversity of those who put it to a bad use. Nor is it owing to an arrangement 
among men that the expression of affection conciliates the hearer, or that a 
narrative, when it is short and clear, is effective, and that variety arrests 
men's attention without wearying them. And it is the same with other 
directions of the same kind, which, whether the cause in which they are used 
be true or false, are themselves true just in so far as they are effective in 
producing knowledge or belief, or in moving men's minds to desire and 
aversion. And men rather found out that these things are so, than arranged 
that they should be so.</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 37. Use of rhetoric and dialectic" prev="xxxvii_1" next="xxxix_1" id="xxxviii_1">

<h3 id="xxxviii_1-p0.1">Chapter 37</h3>
<p class="par" id="xxxviii_1-p1">55. This art, however, when it is learnt, is not to be used so much for 
ascertaining the meaning as for setting forth the meaning when it is 
ascertained. But the art previously spoken of, which deals with inferences, 
and definitions, and divisions, is of the greatest assistance in the discovery 
of the meaning, provided only that men do not fall into the error of supposing 
that when they have learnt these things they have learnt the true secret of a 
happy life. Still, it sometimes happens that men find less difficulty in 
attaining the object for the sake of which these sciences are learnt, than in 
going through the very intricate and thorny discipline of such rules. It is 
just as if a man wishing to give rules for walking should warn you not to lift 
the hinder foot before you set down the front one, and then should describe 
minutely the way you ought to move the hinges of the joints and knees. For 
what he says is true, and one cannot walk in any other way; but men find it 
easier to walk by executing these movements than to attend to them while they 
are going through them, or to understand when they are told about them. Those, 
on the other hand, who cannot walk, care still less about such directions, as 
they cannot prove them by making trial of them. And in the same way a clever 
man often sees that an inference is unsound more quickly than he apprehends 
the rules for it. A dull man, on the other hand, does not see the unsoundness, 
but much less does he grasp the rules. And in regard to all these laws, we 
derive more pleasure from them as exhibitions of truth, than assistance in 
arguing or forming opinions, except perhaps that they put the intellect in 
better training. We must take care, however, that they do not at the same time 
make it more inclined to mischief or vanity,—that is to say, that they do not 
give those who have learnt them an inclination to lead people astray by 
plausible speech and catching questions, or make them think that they have 
attained some great thing that gives them an advantage over the good and 
innocent.</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 38. The science of numbers not created, but only discovered, by man" prev="xxxviii_1" next="xl_1" id="xxxix_1">

<h3 id="xxxix_1-p0.1">Chapter 38</h3>
<p class="par" id="xxxix_1-p1">56. Coming now to the science of number, it is clear to the dullest 
apprehension that this was not created by man, but was discovered by 
investigation. For, though Virgil could at his own pleasure make the first 
syllable of Italia long, while the ancients pronounced it short, it is not in 
any man's power to determine at his pleasure that three times three are not 
nine, or do not make a square, or are not the triple of three, nor one and a 
half times the number six, or that it is not true that they are not the double 
of any number because odd numbers have no half. Whether, then, numbers are 
considered in themselves, or as applied to the laws of figures, or of sounds, 
or of other motions, they have fixed laws which were not made by man, but 
which the acuteness of ingenious men brought to light.</p>

<p class="par" id="xxxix_1-p2">57. The man, however, who puts so high a value on these things as to be 
inclined to boast himself one of the learned, and who does not rather inquire 
after the source from which those things which he perceives to be true derive 
their truth, and from which those others which he perceives to be unchangeable 
also derive their truth and unchangeableness, and who, mounting up from bodily 
appearances to the mind of man, and finding that it too is changeable (for it 
is sometimes instructed, at other times uninstructed), although it holds a 
middle place between the unchangeable truth above it and the changeable things 
beneath it, does not strive to make all things redound to the praise and love 
of the one God from whom he knows that all things have their being;— the man, 
I say, who acts in this way may seem to be learned, but wise he cannot in any 
sense be deemed.</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 39. To which of the above-mentioned studies attention should be given, and in what spirit" prev="xxxix_1" next="xli" id="xl_1">

<h3 id="xl_1-p0.1">Chapter 39</h3>
<p class="par" id="xl_1-p1">58. Accordingly, I think that it is well to warn studious and able young men, 
who fear God and are seeking for happiness of life, not to venture heedlessly 
upon the pursuit of the branches of learning that are in vogue beyond the pale 
of the Church of Christ, as if these could secure for them the happiness they 
seek; but soberly and carefully to discriminate among them. And if they find 
any of those which have been instituted by men varying by reason of the 
varying pleasure of their founders, and unknown by reason of erroneous 
conjectures, especially if they involve entering into fellowship with devils 
by means of leagues and covenants about signs, let these he utterly rejected 
and held in detestation. Let the young men also withdraw their attention from 
such institutions of men as are unnecessary and luxurious. But for the sake of 
the necessities of this life we must not neglect the arrangements of men that 
enable us to carry on intercourse with those around us. I think, however, 
there is nothing useful in the other branches of learning that are found among 
the heathen, except information about objects, either past or present, that 
relate to the bodily senses, in which are included also the experiments and 
conclusions of the useful mechanical arts, except also the sciences of 
reasoning and of number. And in regard to all these we must hold by the maxim, 
"Not too much of anything;" especially in the case of those which, pertaining 
as they do to the senses, are subject to the relations of space and time.</p>

<p class="par" id="xl_1-p2">59. What, then, some men have done in regard to all words and names found in 
Scripture, in the Hebrew, and Syrian, and Egyptian, and other tongues, taking 
up and interpreting separately such as were left in Scripture without 
interpretation; and what Eusebius has done in regard to the history of the 
past with a view to the questions arising in Scripture that require a 
knowledge of history for their solution;—what, I say, these men have done in 
regard to matters of this kind, making it unnecessary for the Christian to 
spend his strength on many subjects for the sake of a few items of knowledge, 
the same, I think, might be done in regard to other matters, if any competent 
man were willing in a spirit of benevolence to undertake the labour for the 
advantage of his brethren. In this way he might arrange in their several 
classes, and give an account of the unknown places, and animals, and plants, 
and trees, and stones, and metals, and other species of things that are 
mentioned in Scripture, taking up these only, and committing his account to 
writing. This might also be done in relation to numbers, so that the theory of 
those numbers, and those only, which are mentioned in Holy Scripture, might be 
explained and written down. And it may happen that some or all of these things 
have been done already (as I have found that many things I had no notion of 
have been worked out and committed to writing by good and learned Christians), 
but are either lost amid the crowds of the careless, or are kept out of sight 
by the envious. And I am not sure whether the same thing can be done in regard 
to the theory of reasoning; but it seems to me it cannot, because this runs 
like a system of nerves through the whole structure of Scripture, and on that 
account is of more service to the reader in disentangling and explaining 
ambiguous passages, of which I shall speak hereafter, than in ascertaining the 
meaning of unknown signs, the topic I am now discussing.</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 40. Whatever has been rightly said by the heathen, we must appropriate to our uses" prev="xl_1" next="xlii" id="xli">

<h3 id="xli-p0.1">Chapter 40</h3>
<p class="par" id="xli-p1">60. Moreover, if those who are called philosophers, and especially the 
Platonists, have said aught that is true and in harmony with our faith, we are 
not only not to shrink from it, but to claim it for our own use from those who 
have unlawful possession of it. For, as the Egyptians had not only the idols 
and heavy burdens which the people of Israel hated and fled from, but also 
vessels and ornaments of gold and silver, and garments, which the same people 
when going out of Egypt appropriated to themselves, designing them for a 
better use, not doing this on their own authority, but by the command of God, 
the Egyptians themselves, in their ignorance, providing them with things which 
they themselves, were not making a good use of; in the same way all branches 
of heathen learning have not only false and superstitious fancies and heavy 
burdens of unnecessary toil, which every one of us, when going out under the 
leadership of Christ from the fellowship of the heathen, ought to abhor and 
avoid; but they contain also liberal instruction which is better adapted to 
the use of the truth, and some most excellent precepts of morality; and some 
truths in regard even to the worship of the One God are found among them. Now 
these are, so to speak, their gold and silver, which they did not create 
themselves, but dug out of the mines of God's providence which are everywhere 
scattered abroad, and are perversely and unlawfully prostituting to the 
worship of devils. These, therefore, the Christian, when he separates himself 
in spirit from the miserable fellowship of these men, ought to take away from 
them, and to devote to their proper use in preaching the gospel. Their 
garments, also,—that is, human institutions such as are adapted to that 
intercourse with men which is indispensable in this life,—we must take and 
turn to a Christian use.</p>

<p class="par" id="xli-p2">61. And what else have many good and faithful men among our brethren done? Do 
we not see with what a quantity of gold and silver and garments Cyprian, that 
most persuasive teacher and most blessed martyr, was loaded when he came out 
of Egypt? How much Lactantius brought with him? And Victorious, and Optatus, 
and Hilary, not to speak of living men! How much Greeks out of number have 
borrowed! And prior to all these, that most faithful servant of God, Moses, 
had done the same thing; for of him it is written that he was learned in all 
the wisdom of the Egyptians. And to none of all these would heathen 
superstition (especially in those times when, kicking against the yoke of 
Christ, it was persecuting the Christians) have ever furnished branches of 
knowledge it held useful, if it had suspected they were about to turn them to 
the use of worshipping the One God, and thereby overturning the vain worship 
of idols. But they gave their gold and their silver and their garments to the 
people of God as they were going out of Egypt, not knowing how the things they 
gave would be turned to the service of Christ. For what was done at the time 
of the exodus was no doubt a type prefiguring what happens now. And this I say 
without prejudice to any other interpretation that may be as good, or better.</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 41. What kind of spirit is required for the study of Holy Scripture" prev="xli" next="xliii" id="xlii">

<h3 id="xlii-p0.1">Chapter 41</h3>
<p class="par" id="xlii-p1">62. But when the student of the Holy Scriptures, prepared in the way I have 
indicated, shall enter upon his investigations, let him constantly meditate 
upon that saying of the apostle's, "Knowledge puffeth up, but charity 
edifieth." For so he will feel that, whatever may be the riches he brings with 
him out of Egypt, yet unless he has kept the Passover, he cannot be safe. Now 
Christ is our Passover sacrificed for us, and there is nothing the sacrifice 
of Christ more clearly teaches us than the call which He himself addresses to 
those whom He sees toiling in Egypt under Pharaoh: "Come unto me, all ye that 
labour and are heavy laden, and I will give you rest. Take my yoke upon you, 
and learn of me; for I am meek and lowly in heart: and ye shall find rest unto 
your souls. For my yoke is easy, and my burden is light." To whom is it light 
but to the meek and lowly in heart, whom knowledge does not puff up, but 
charity edifieth? Let them remember, then, that those who celebrated the 
Passover at that time in type and shadow, when they were ordered to mark their 
door-posts with the blood of the lamb, used hyssop to mark them with. Now this 
is a meek and lowly herb, and yet nothing is stronger and more penetrating 
than its roots; that being rooted and grounded in love, we may be able to 
comprehend with all saints what is the breadth, and length, and depth, and 
height,—that is, to comprehend the cross of our Lord, the breadth of which is 
indicated by the transverse wood on which the hands are stretched, its length 
by the part from the ground up to the crossbar on which the whole body from 
the head downwards is fixed, its height by the part from the crossbar to the 
top on which the head lies, and its depth by the part which is hidden, being 
fixed in the earth. And by this sign of the cross all Christian action is 
symbolized, viz., to do good works in Christ, to cling with constancy to Him, 
to hope for heaven, and not to desecrate the sacraments. And purified by this 
Christian action, we shall be able to know even "the love of Christ which 
passeth knowledge," who is equal to the Father, by whom all things, were made, 
"that we may be filled with all the fullness of God." There is besides in 
hyssop a purgative virtue, that the breast may not be swollen with that 
knowledge which puffeth up, nor boast vainly of the riches brought out from 
Egypt. "Purge me with hyssop," the psalmist says, "and I shall be clean; wash 
me, and I shall be whiter than snow. Make me to hear joy and gladness." Then 
he immediately adds, to show that it is purifying from pride that is indicated 
by hyssop, "that the bones which Thou hast broken may rejoice."</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 42. Sacred Scripture compared with profane authors" prev="xlii" next="iv.iv" id="xliii">

<h3 id="xliii-p0.1">Chapter 42</h3>
<p class="par" id="xliii-p1">63. But just as poor as the store of gold and silver and garments which the 
people of Israel brought with them out of Egypt was in comparison with the 
riches which they afterwards attained at Jerusalem, and which reached their 
height in the reign of King Solomon, so poor is all the useful knowledge which 
is gathered from the books of the heathen when compared with the knowledge of 
Holy Scripture. For whatever man may have learnt from other sources, if it is 
hurtful, it is there condemned; if it is useful, it is therein contained. And 
while every man may find there all that he has learnt of useful elsewhere, he 
will find there in much greater abundance things that are to be found nowhere 
else, but can be learnt only in the wonderful sublimity and wonderful 
simplicity of the Scriptures.</p>
<p class="Body" style="margin-top:6pt" id="xliii-p2">When, then, the reader is possessed of the instruction here pointed out, so 
that unknown signs have ceased to be a hindrance to him; when he is meek and 
lowly of heart, subject to the easy yoke of Christ, and loaded with His light 
burden, rooted and grounded and built up in faith, so that knowledge cannot 
puff him up, let him then approach the consideration and discussion of 
ambiguous signs in Scripture. And about these I shall now, in a third book, 
endeavour to say what the Lord shall be pleased to vouchsafe.</p></div3>


</div2>

<div2 type="book" title="Book III." progress="47.27%" prev="xliii" next="iv.iv.i" id="iv.iv">

<div3 title="Argument." prev="iv.iv" next="iv.iv.ii" id="iv.iv.i">
<p class="Body" id="iv.iv.i-p1"><i>The author, having discussed in the preceding book the method of 
dealing with unknown signs, goes on in this third book to treat of ambiguous 
signs. Such signs may be either direct or figurative. In the case of direct 
signs ambiguity may arise from the punctuation, the pronunciation, or the 
doubtful signification of the words, and is to be resolved by attention to the 
context, a comparison of translations, or a reference to the original tongue. 
In the case of figurative signs we need to guard against two mistakes:—1. the 
interpreting literal expressions figuratively; 2. the interpreting figurative 
expressions literally. The author lays down rules by which we may decide 
whether an expression is literal or figurative; the general rule being, that 
whatever can be shown to be in its literal sense inconsistent either with 
purity of life or correctness of doctrine must be taken figuratively. He then 
goes on to lay down rules for the interpretation of expressions which have 
been proved to be figurative; the general principle being, that no 
interpretation can be true which does not promote the love of God and the love 
of man. The author then proceeds to expound and illustrate the seven rules of 
Tichonius the Donatist, which he commends to the attention of the student of 
Holy Scripture. </i></p>


</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 1. Summary of the foregoing books, and scope of that which follows" prev="iv.iv.i" next="iv.iv.iii" id="iv.iv.ii">

<h3 id="iv.iv.ii-p0.1">Chapter 1</h3>
<p class="par" id="iv.iv.ii-p1">1. The man who fears God seeks diligently in Holy Scripture for a knowledge 
of His will. And when he has become meek through piety, so as to have no love 
of strife; when furnished also with a knowledge of languages, so as not to be 
stopped by unknown words and forms of speech, and with the knowledge of 
certain necessary objects, so as not to be ignorant of the force and nature of 
those which are used figuratively; and assisted, besides, by accuracy in the 
texts, which has been secured by skill and care in the matter of 
correction;—when thus prepared, let him proceed to the examination and 
solution of the ambiguities of Scripture. And that he may not be led astray by 
ambiguous signs, I so far as I can give him instruction (it may happen 
however, that either from the greatness of his intellect, or the greater 
clearness of the light he enjoys, he shall laugh at the methods I am going to 
point out as childish),—but yet, as I was going to say, so far as I can give 
instruction, let him who is in such a state of mind that he can be instructed 
by me know, that the ambiguity of Scripture lies either in proper words or in 
metaphorical, classes which I have already described in the second book.</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 2. Rule for removing ambiguity by attending to punctuation" prev="iv.iv.ii" next="iv.iv.iv" id="iv.iv.iii">

<h3 id="iv.iv.iii-p0.1">Chapter 2</h3>
<p class="par" id="iv.iv.iii-p1">2. But when proper words make Scripture ambiguous, we must see in the first 
place that there is nothing wrong in our punctuation or pronunciation. 
Accordingly, if, when attention is given to the passage, it shall appear to be 
uncertain in what way it ought to be punctuated or pronounced, let the reader 
consult the rule of faith which he has gathered from the plainer passages of 
Scripture, and from the authority of the Church, and of which I treated at 
sufficient length when I was speaking in the first book about things. But if 
both readings, or all of them (if there are more than two), give a meaning in 
harmony with the faith, it remains to consult the context, both what goes 
before and what comes after, to see which interpretation, out of many that 
offer themselves, it pronounces for and permits to be dovetailed into itself.</p>

<p class="par" id="iv.iv.iii-p2">3. Now look at some examples. The heretical pointing, "<span lang="LA" style="font-style:italic" id="iv.iv.iii-p2.1">In principio erat 
verbum, et verbum erat apud Deum, et Deus erat</span>" (In the beginning was the 
Word, and the Word was with God, and God was), so as to make the next sentence 
run, "<span lang="LA" style="font-style:italic" id="iv.iv.iii-p2.2">Verbum hoc erat in principio apud Deum</span>" (This word was in the 
beginning with God), arises out of unwillingness to confess that the Word was 
God. But this must be rejected by the rule of faith, which, in reference to 
the equality of the Trinity, directs us to say: "<span lang="LA" style="font-style:italic" id="iv.iv.iii-p2.3">et Deus erat verbum</span>" 
(and the Word was God); and then to add: "<span lang="LA" style="font-style:italic" id="iv.iv.iii-p2.4">hoc erat in principio apud 
Deum</span>" (the same was in the beginning with God).</p>

<p class="par" id="iv.iv.iii-p3">4. But the following ambiguity of punctuation does not go against the faith 
in either way you take it, and therefore must be decided from the context. It 
is where the apostle says: "<scripture passage="Philippians 1:20-24" parsed="|Phil|1|20|1|24" osisRef="Bible:Phil.1.20-Phil.1.24" />What I shall choose I wot not: for I am in a 
strait betwixt two, having a desire to depart, and to be with Christ, which is 
far better: nevertheless to abide in the flesh is more needful for you." Now 
it is uncertain whether we should read, "<span lang="LA" style="font-style:italic" id="iv.iv.iii-p3.1">ex duobus concupiscentiam habens</span>" [having a desire for two things], or "<span lang="LA" style="font-style:italic" id="iv.iv.iii-p3.2">compellor autem ex duobus</span>" 
[I am in a strait betwixt two]; and so to add: "<span lang="LA" style="font-style:italic" id="iv.iv.iii-p3.3">concupiscentiam habens 
dissolvi, et esse cum Christo</span>" [having a desire to depart, and to be with 
Christ]. But since there follows "<span lang="LA" style="font-style:italic" id="iv.iv.iii-p3.4">multo enim magis optimum</span>" [for it is 
far better], it is evident that he says he has a desire for that which is 
better; so that, while he is in a strait betwixt two, yet he has a desire for 
one and sees a necessity for the other; a desire, viz., to be with Christ, and 
a necessity to remain in the flesh. Now this ambiguity is resolved by one word 
that follows, which is translated <span lang="LA" id="iv.iv.iii-p3.5">denim</span> [for]; and the translators who have 
omitted this particle have preferred the interpretation which makes the 
apostle seem not only in a strait betwixt two, but also to have a desire for 
two. We must therefore punctuate the sentence thus: "<span lang="LA" style="font-style:italic" id="iv.iv.iii-p3.6">et quid eligam ignoro: 
compellor autem ex duobus</span>" [what I shall choose I wot not: for I am in a 
strait betwixt two]; and after this point follows: "<span lang="LA" style="font-style:italic" id="iv.iv.iii-p3.7">concupiscentiam habens 
dissolvi, et esse cum Christo</span>" [having a desire to depart, and to be with 
Christ]. And, as if he were asked why he has a desire for this in preference 
to the other, he adds: "<span lang="LA" style="font-style:italic" id="iv.iv.iii-p3.8">multo enim magis optimum</span>" [for it is far 
better]. Why, then, is he in a strait betwixt the two? Because there is a need 
for his remaining, which he adds in these terms: "<span lang="LA" style="font-style:italic" id="iv.iv.iii-p3.9">manere in carne 
necessarium propter vos</span>" [nevertheless to abide in the flesh is more 
needful for you].</p>

<p class="par" id="iv.iv.iii-p4">5. Where, however, the ambiguity cannot be cleared up, either by the rule of 
faith or by the context, there is nothing to hinder us to point the sentence 
according to any method we choose of those that suggest themselves. As is the 
case in that passage to the Corinthians: "<scripture passage="2 Corinthians 7:1-2" parsed="|2Cor|7|1|7|2" osisRef="Bible:2Cor.7.1-2Cor.7.2" />Having therefore these promises, 
dearly beloved, let us cleanse ourselves from all filthiness of the flesh and 
spirit, perfecting holiness in the fear of God. Receive us; we have wronged no 
man." It is doubtful whether we should read, <span lang="LA" id="iv.iv.iii-p4.1">mundemus nos ab omni 
coinquinatione carnis et spiritus</span>" [let us cleanse ourselves from all 
filthiness of the flesh and spirit], in accordance with the passage, "that she 
may be holy both in body and in spirit," or, "<span lang="LA" style="font-style:italic" id="iv.iv.iii-p4.2">mundemus nos ab omni 
coinquintione carnis</span>" [let us cleanse ourselves from all filthiness of the 
flesh], so as to make the next sentence, "<span lang="LA" style="font-style:italic" id="iv.iv.iii-p4.3">et spiritus perficientes 
sanctificationem in timore Dei capite nos</span>" [and perfecting holiness of 
spirit in the fear of God, receive us]. Such ambiguities of punctuation, 
therefore, are left to the reader's discretion.</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 3. How pronunciation serves to remove ambiguity—different kinds of interrogation" prev="iv.iv.iii" next="v_2" id="iv.iv.iv">

<h3 id="iv.iv.iv-p0.1">Chapter 3</h3>
<p class="par" id="iv.iv.iv-p1">6. And all the directions that I have given about ambiguous punctuations are 
to be observed likewise in the case of doubtful pronunciations. For these too, 
unless the fault lies in the carelessness of the reader, are corrected either 
by the rule of faith, or by a reference to the preceding or succeeding 
context; or if neither of these methods is applied with success, they will 
remain doubtful, but so that the reader will not be in fault in whatever way 
he may pronounce them. For example, if our faith that God will not bring any 
charges against His elect, and that Christ will not condemn His elect, did not 
stand in the way, this passage, "Who shall lay anything to the charge of God's 
elect?" might be pronounced in such a way as to make what follows an answer to 
this question, "God who justifieth," and to make a second question, "Who is he 
that condemneth?" with the answer, "Christ Jesus who died." But as it would be 
the height of madness to believe this, the passage will be pronounced in such 
a way as to make the first part a question of inquiry, and the second a 
rhetorical interrogative. Now the ancients said that the difference between an 
inquiry and an interrogative was this, that an inquiry admits of many answers, 
but to an interrogative the answer must be either "No" or "Yes." The passage 
will be pronounced, then, in such a way that after the inquiry, "Who shall lay 
anything to the charge of God's elect?" what follows will be put as an 
interrogative: "Shall God who justifieth?" the answer "No" being understood. 
And in the same way we shall have the inquiry, "Who is he that condemneth?" 
and the answer here again in the form of an interrogative, "Is it Christ who 
died? yea, rather, who is risen again? who is even at the right hand of God? 
who also maketh intercession for us?" the answer "No" being understood to 
every one of these questions. On the other hand, in that passage where the 
apostle says, "What shall we say then? That the Gentiles which followed not 
after righteousness have attained to righteousness;" unless after the inquiry, 
"What shall we say then?" what follows were given as the answer to this 
question: "That the Gentiles, which followed not after righteousness, have 
attained to righteousness;" it would not be in harmony with the succeeding 
context. But with whatever tone of voice one may choose to pronounce that 
saying of Nathanael's, "<scripture passage="John 1:46" parsed="|John|1|46|0|0" osisRef="Bible:John.1.46" />Can any good thing come out of Nazareth?"—whether 
with that of a man who gives an affirmative answer, so that "out of Nazareth" 
is the only part that belongs to the interrogation, or with that of a man who 
asks the whole question with doubt and hesitation,—I do not see how a 
difference can be made. But neither sense is opposed to faith.</p>

<p class="par" id="iv.iv.iv-p2">7. There is, again, an ambiguity arising out of the doubtful sound of 
syllables; and this of course has relation to pronunciation. For example, in 
the passage, "My bone [<span lang="LA" id="iv.iv.iv-p2.1">os meum</span>] was not hid from Thee, which Thou didst make 
in secret," it is not clear to the reader whether he should take the word "<span lang="LA" id="iv.iv.iv-p2.2">os</span>" 
as short or long. If he make it short, it is the singular of <span lang="LA" id="iv.iv.iv-p2.3">ossa</span> [bones]; if 
he make it long, it is the singular of <span lang="LA" id="iv.iv.iv-p2.4">ora</span> [mouths]. Now difficulties such as 
this are cleared up by looking into the original tongue, for in the Greek we 
find not "stome" [mouth], but "osteon" [bone]. And for this reason the vulgar 
idiom is frequently more useful in conveying the sense than the pure speech of 
the educated. For I would rather have the barbarism, "<span lang="LA" style="font-style:italic" id="iv.iv.iv-p2.5">non est absconditum a 
te ossum meum</span>", than have the passage in better Latin but the sense less 
clear. But sometimes when the sound of a syllable is doubtful, it is decided 
by a word near it belonging to the same sentence. As, for example, that saying 
of the apostle, "Of the which I tell you before [<span lang="LA" id="iv.iv.iv-p2.6">praedico</span>], as I have also 
told you in time past [<span lang="LA" id="iv.iv.iv-p2.7">praedixi</span>], that <scripture passage="Galatians 5:21" parsed="|Gal|5|21|0|0" osisRef="Bible:Gal.5.21" />they which do such things shall not 
inherit the kingdom of God." Now if he had only said, "Of the which I tell you 
before [<span lang="LA" id="iv.iv.iv-p2.8">quae praedico vobis</span>]", and had not added, "as I have also told you in 
time past [<span lang="LA" id="iv.iv.iv-p2.9">sicut praedixi</span>]," we could not know without going back to the 
original whether in the word praedico the middle syllable should be pronounced 
long or short. But as it is, it is clear that it should be pronounced long; 
for he does not say, <span lang="LA" id="iv.iv.iv-p2.10">sicut praedicavi</span>, but <span lang="LA" id="iv.iv.iv-p2.11">sicut praedixi</span>.</p> 

</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 4. How ambiguities may be solved" prev="iv.iv.iv" next="vi_2" id="v_2">

<h3 id="v_2-p0.1">Chapter 4</h3>
<p class="par" id="v_2-p1">8. And not only these, but also those ambiguities that do not relate either 
to punctuation or pronunciation, are to be examined in the same way. For 
example, that one in the Epistle to the Thessalonians: "<span lang="LA" id="v_2-p1.1">Propterea consolati 
sumus fratres in vobis</span>". Now it is doubtful whether "<span lang="LA" id="v_2-p1.2">fratres</span>" [brethren] is in 
the vocative or accusative case, and it is not contrary to faith to take it 
either way. But in the Greek language the two cases are not the same in form; 
and accordingly, when we look into the original, the case is shown to be 
vocative. Now if the translator had chosen to say, "<span lang="LA" id="v_2-p1.3">propterea consolationem 
habuimus fratres in vobis</span>", he would have followed the words less literally, 
but there would have been less doubt about the meaning; or, indeed, if he had 
added "<span lang="LA" id="v_2-p1.4">nostri</span>", hardly any one would have doubted that the vocative case was 
meant when he heard "<span lang="LA" id="v_2-p1.5">propterea consolationem habuimus fratres in vobis</span>", But 
this is a rather dangerous liberty to take. It has been taken, however in that 
passage to the Corinthians, where the apostle says, "I protest by your 
rejoicing [<span lang="LA" id="v_2-p1.6">per vestram gloriam</span>] which I have in Christ Jesus our Lord, I die 
daily." For one translator has it, <span lang="LA" id="v_2-p1.7">"per vestram" juro "gloriam"</span>, the form of 
adjuration appearing in the Greek without any ambiguity. It is therefore very 
rare and very difficult to find any ambiguity in the case of proper words, as 
far at least as Holy Scripture is concerned, which neither the context, 
showing the design of the writer, nor a comparison of translations, nor a 
reference to the original tongue, will suffice to explain.</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 5. It is a wretched slavery which takes the figurative expressions of Scripture in a literal sense" prev="v_2" next="vii_2" id="vi_2">

<h3 id="vi_2-p0.1">Chapter 5</h3>
<p class="par" id="vi_2-p1">9. But the ambiguities of metaphorical words, about which I am next to speak, 
demand no ordinary care and diligence. In the first place, we must beware of 
taking a figurative expression literally. For the saying of the apostle 
applies in this case too: "The letter killeth, but the spirit giveth life." 
For when what is said figuratively is taken as if it were said literally, it 
is understood in a carnal manner. And nothing is more fittingly called the 
death of the soul than when that in it which raises it above the brutes, the 
intelligence namely, is put in subjection to the flesh by a blind adherence to 
the letter. For he who follows the letter takes figurative words as if they 
were proper, and does not carry out what is indicated by a proper word into 
its secondary signification; but, if he hears of the Sabbath, for example, 
thinks of nothing but the one day out of seven which recurs in constant 
succession; and when he hears of a sacrifice, does not carry his thoughts 
beyond the customary offerings of victims from the flock, and of the fruits of 
the earth. Now it is surely a miserable slavery of the soul to take signs for 
things, and to be unable to lift the eye of the mind above what is corporeal 
and created, that it may drink in eternal light.</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 6. Utility of the bondage of the Jews" prev="vi_2" next="viii_2" id="vii_2">

<h3 id="vii_2-p0.1">Chapter 6</h3>
<p class="par" id="vii_2-p1">10. This bondage, however, in the case of the Jewish people, differed widely 
from what it was in the case of the other nations; because, though the former 
were in bondage to temporal things, it was in such a way that in all these the 
One God was put before their minds. And although they paid attention to the 
signs of spiritual realities in place of the realities themselves, not knowing 
to what the signs referred, still they had this conviction rooted in their 
minds, that in subjecting themselves to such a bondage they were doing the 
pleasure of the one invisible God of all. And the apostle describes this 
bondage as being like to that of boys under the guidance of a schoolmaster. 
And those who clung obstinately to such signs could not endure our Lord's 
neglect of them when the time for their revelation had come. And hence their 
leaders brought it as a charge against Him that He healed on the Sabbath, and 
the people, clinging to these signs as it they were realities, could not 
believe that one who refused to observe them in the way the Jews did was God, 
or came from God. But those who did believe, from among whom the first Church 
at Jerusalem was formed, showed clearly how great an advantage it had been to 
be so guided by the schoolmaster that signs, which had been for a season 
imposed on the obedient, fixed the thoughts of those who observed them on the 
worship of the One God who made heaven and earth. These men, because they had 
been very near to spiritual things (for even in the temporal and carnal 
offerings and types, though they did not clearly apprehend their spiritual 
meaning, they had learnt to adore the One Eternal God,) were filled with such 
a measure of the Holy Spirit that they sold all their goods, and laid their 
price at the apostles' feet to be distributed among the needy, and consecrated 
themselves wholly to God as a new temple, of which the old temple they were 
serving was but the earthly type.</p>

<p class="par" id="vii_2-p2">11. Now it is not recorded that any of the Gentile churches did this, because 
men who had for their gods idols made with hands had not been so near to 
spiritual things.</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 7. The useless bondage of the gentiles" prev="vii_2" next="ix_2" id="viii_2">
<h3 id="viii_2-p0.1">Chapter 7</h3>
<p class="Body" id="viii_2-p1">And if ever any of them endeavoured to make it out that their idols were 
only signs, yet still they used them in reference to the worship and adoration 
of the creature. What difference does it make to me, for instance, that the 
image of Neptune is not itself to be considered a god, but only as 
representing the wide ocean, and all the other waters besides that spring out 
of fountains? As it is described by a poet of theirs, who says, if I recollect 
aright, "Thou, Father Neptune, whose hoary temples are wreathed with the 
resounding sea, whose beard is the mighty ocean flowing forth unceasingly, and 
whose hair is the winding rivers." This husk shakes its rattling stones within 
a sweet covering, and yet it is not food for men, but for swine. He who knows 
the gospel knows what I mean. What profit is it to me, then, that the image of 
Neptune is used with a reference to this explanation of it, unless indeed the 
result be that I worship neither? For any statue you like to take is as much 
god to me as the wide ocean. I grant, however, that they who make gods of the 
works of man have sunk lower than they who make gods of the works of God. But 
the command is that we should love and serve the One God, who is the Maker of 
all those things, the images of which are worshipped by the heathen either as 
gods, or as signs and representations of gods. If, then, to take a sign which 
has been established for a useful end instead of the thing itself which it was 
designed to signify, is bondage to the flesh, how much more so is it to take 
signs intended to represent useless things for the things themselves! For even 
if you go back to the very things signified by such signs, and engage your 
mind in the worship of these, you will not be anything the more free from the 
burden and the livery of bondage to the flesh.</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 8. The Jews liberated from their bondage in one way, the gentiles in another" prev="viii_2" next="x_2" id="ix_2">

<h3 id="ix_2-p0.1">Chapter 8</h3>
<p class="par" id="ix_2-p1">12. Accordingly the liberty that comes by Christ took those whom it found 
under bondage to useful signs, and who were (so to speak) near to it, and, 
interpreting the signs to which they were in bondage, set them free by raising 
them to the realities of which these were signs. And out of such were formed 
the churches of the saints of Israel. Those, on the other hand, whom it found 
in bondage to useless signs, it not only freed from their slavery to such 
signs, but brought to nothing and cleared out of the way all these signs 
themselves, so that the gentiles were turned from the corruption of a 
multitude of false gods, which Scripture frequently and justly speaks of as 
fornication, to the worship of the One God: not that they might now fall into 
bondage to signs of a useful kind, but rather that they might exercise their 
minds in the spiritual understanding of such.</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 9. Who is in bondage to signs, and who not" prev="ix_2" next="xi_2" id="x_2">

<h3 id="x_2-p0.1">Chapter 9</h3>
<p class="par" id="x_2-p1">13. Now he is in bondage to a sign who uses, or pays homage to, any 
significant object without knowing what it signifies: he, on the other hand, 
who either uses or honours a useful sign divinely appointed, whose force and 
significance he understands, does not honour the sign which is seen and 
temporal, but that to which all such signs refer. Now such a man is spiritual 
and free even at the time of his bondage, when it is not yet expedient to 
reveal to carnal minds those signs by subjection to which their carnality is 
to be overcome. To this class of spiritual persons belonged the patriarchs and 
the prophets, and all those among the people of Israel through whose 
instrumentality the Holy Spirit ministered unto us the aids and consolations 
of the Scriptures. But at the present time, after that the proof of our 
liberty has shone forth so clearly in the resurrection of our Lord, we are not 
oppressed with the heavy burden of attending even to those signs which we now 
understand, but our Lord Himself, and apostolic practice, have handed down to 
us a few rites in place of many, and these at once very easy to perform, most 
majestic in their significance, and most sacred in the observance; such, for 
example, as the Sacrament of baptism, and the celebration of the body and 
blood of the Lord. And as soon as any one looks upon these observances he 
knows to what they refer, and so reveres them not in carnal bondage, but in 
spiritual freedom. Now, as to follow the letter, and to take signs for the 
things that are signified by them, is a mark of weakness and bondage; so to 
interpret signs wrongly is the result of being misled by error. He, however, 
who does not understand what a sign signifies, but yet knows that it is a 
sign, is not in bondage. And it is better even to be in bondage to unknown but 
useful signs than, by interpreting them wrongly, to draw the neck from under 
the yoke of bondage only to insert it in the coils of error.</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 10. How we are to discern whether a phrase is figurative" prev="x_2" next="xii_2" id="xi_2">

<h3 id="xi_2-p0.1">Chapter 10</h3>
<p class="par" id="xi_2-p1">14. But in addition to the foregoing rule, which guards us against taking a 
metaphorical form of speech as if it were literal, we must also pay heed to 
that which tells us not to take a literal form of speech as if it were 
figurative. In the first place, then, we must show the way to find out whether 
a phrase is literal or figurative. And the way is certainly as follows: 
Whatever there is in the word of God that cannot, when taken literally, be 
referred either to purity of life or soundness of doctrine, you may set down 
as figurative. Purity of life has reference to the love of God and one's 
neighbour; soundness of doctrine to the knowledge of God and one's neighbour. 
Every man, moreover, has hope in his own conscience, so far as he perceives 
that he has attained to the love and knowledge of God and his neighbour. Now 
all these matters have been spoken of in the first book.</p>

<p class="par" id="xi_2-p2">15. But as men are prone to estimate sins, not by reference to their inherent 
sinfulness, but rather by reference to their own customs, it frequently 
happens that a man will think nothing blameable except what the men of his own 
country and time are accustomed to condemn, and nothing worthy of praise or 
approval except what is sanctioned by the custom of his companions; and thus 
it comes to pass, that if Scripture either enjoins what is opposed to the 
customs of the hearers, or condemns what is not so opposed, and if at the same 
time the authority of the word has a hold upon their minds, they think that 
the expression is figurative. Now Scripture enjoins nothing except charity, 
and condemns nothing except lust, and in that way fashions the lives of men. 
In the same way, if an erroneous opinion has taken possession of the mind, men 
think that whatever Scripture asserts contrary to this must be figurative. Now 
Scripture asserts nothing but the catholic faith, in regard to things past, 
future, and present. It is a narrative of the past, a prophecy of the future, 
and a description of the present. But all these tend to nourish and strengthen 
charity, and to overcome and root out lust.</p>

<p class="par" id="xi_2-p3">16. I mean by charity that affection of the mind which aims at the enjoyment 
of God for His own sake, and the enjoyment of ones self and one's neighbour in 
subordination to God; by lust I mean that affection of the mind which aims at 
enjoying one's self and one's neighbour, and other corporeal things, without 
reference to God. Again, what lust, when unsubdued, does towards corrupting 
one's own soul and body, is called vice; but what it does to injure another is 
called crime. And these are the two classes into which all sins may be 
divided. But the vices come first; for when these have exhausted the soul, and 
reduced it to a kind of poverty, it easily slides into crimes, in order to 
remove hindrances to, or to find assistance in, its vices. In the same way, 
what charity does with a view to one's own advantage is prudence; but what it 
does with a view to a neighbor's advantage is called benevolence. And here 
prudence comes first; because no one can confer an advantage on another which 
he does not himself possess. Now in proportion as the dominion of lust is 
pulled down, in the same proportion is that of charity built up.</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 11. Rule for interpreting phrases which seem to ascribe severity to God and the saints" prev="xi_2" next="xiii_2" id="xii_2">

<h3 id="xii_2-p0.1">Chapter 11</h3>
<p class="par" id="xii_2-p1">17. Every severity, therefore, and apparent cruelty, either in word or deed, 
that is ascribed in Holy Scripture to God or His saints, avails to the pulling 
down of the dominion of lust. And if its meaning be clear, we are not to give 
it some secondary reference, as if it were spoken figuratively. Take, for 
example, that saying of the apostle: "But, after thy hardness and impenitent 
heart, treasures up unto thyself wrath against the day of wrath and revelation 
of the righteous judgment of God; who will render to every man according to 
his deeds: to them who, by patient continuance in well-doing, seek for glory, 
and honour, and immortality, eternal life; but unto them that are contentious, 
and do not obey the truth, but obey unrighteousness, indignation and wrath, 
tribulation and anguish, upon every soul of man that does evil, of the Jew 
first, and also of the Gentile." But this is addressed to those who, being 
unwilling to subdue their lust, are themselves involved in the destruction of 
their lust. When, however, the dominion of lust is overturned in a man over 
whom it had held sway, this plain expression is used: "They that are Christ's 
have crucified the flesh, with the affections and lusts." Only that, even in 
these instances, some words are used figuratively, as for example, "the wrath 
of God" and "crucified." But these are not so numerous, nor placed in such a 
way as to obscure the sense, and make it allegorical or enigmatical, which is 
the kind of expression properly called figurative. But in the saying addressed 
to Jeremiah, "See, I have this day set thee over the nations, and over the 
kingdoms, to root out, and to pull down, and to destroy, and to throw down," 
there is no doubt the whole of the language is figurative, and to be referred 
to the end I have spoken of.</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 12. Rule for interpreting those sayings and actions which  are ascribed to God and the saints and which yet seem to the unskilful to be  wicked" prev="xii_2" next="xiv_2" id="xiii_2">

<h3 id="xiii_2-p0.1">Chapter 12</h3>
<p class="par" id="xiii_2-p1">18. Those things, again, whether only sayings or whether actual deeds, which 
appear to the inexperienced to be sinful, and which are ascribed to God, or to 
men whose holiness is put before us as an example, are wholly figurative, and 
the hidden kernel of meaning they contain is to be picked out as food for the 
nourishment of charity. Now, whoever uses transitory objects less freely than 
is the custom of those among whom he lives, is either temperate or 
superstitious; whoever, on the other hand, uses them so as to transgress the 
bounds of the custom of the good men about him, either has a further meaning 
in what he does, or is sinful. In all such matters it is not the use of the 
objects, but the lust of the user, that is to blame. Nobody in his sober 
senses would believe, for example, that when our Lord's feet were anointed by 
the woman with precious ointment, it was for the same purpose for which 
luxurious and profligate men are accustomed to have theirs anointed in those 
banquets which we abhor. For the sweet odour means the good report which is 
earned by a life of good works; and the man who wins this, while following in 
the footsteps of Christ, anoints His feet (so to speak) with the most precious 
ointment. And so that which in the case of other persons is often a sin, 
becomes, when ascribed to God or a prophet, the sign of some great truth. 
Keeping company with a harlot, for example, is one thing when it is the result 
of abandoned manners, another thing when done in the course of his prophecy by 
the prophet Hosea. Because it is a shamefully wicked thing to strip the body 
naked at a banquet among the drunken and licentious, it does not follow that 
it is a sin to be naked in the baths.</p>

<p class="par" id="xiii_2-p2">19. We must, therefore, consider carefully what is suitable to times and 
places and persons, and not rashly charge men with sins. For it is possible 
that a wise man may use the daintiest food without any sin of epicurism or 
gluttony, while a fool will crave for the vilest food with a most disgusting 
eagerness of appetite. And any sane man would prefer eating fish after the 
manner of our Lord, to eating lentils after the manner of Esau, or barley 
after the manner of oxen. For there are several beasts that feed on commoner 
kinds of food, but it does not follow that they are more temperate than we 
are. For in all matters of this kind it is not the nature of the things we 
use, but our reason for using them, and our manner of seeking them, that make 
what we do either praiseworthy or blameable.</p>

<p class="par" id="xiii_2-p3">20. Now the saints of ancient times were, under the form of an earthly 
kingdom, foreshadowing and foretelling the kingdom of heaven. And on account 
of the necessity for a numerous offspring, the custom of one man having 
several wives was at that time blameless: and for the same reason it was not 
proper for one woman to have several husbands, because a woman does not in 
that way become more fruitful, but, on the contrary, it is base harlotry to 
seek either gain or offspring by promiscuous intercourse. In regard to matters 
of this sort, whatever the holy men of those times did without lust, Scripture 
passes over without blame, although they did things which could not be done at 
the present time, except through lust. And everything of this nature that is 
there narrated we are to take not only in its historical and literal, but also 
in its figurative and prophetical sense, and to interpret as bearing 
ultimately upon the end of love towards God or our neighbour, or both. For as 
it was disgraceful among the ancient Romans to wear tunics reaching to the 
heels, and furnished with sleeves, but now it is disgraceful for men honorably 
born not to wear tunics of that description: so we must take heed in regard to 
other things also, that lust do not mix with our use of them; for lust not 
only abuses to wicked ends the customs of those among whom we live, but 
frequently also transgressing the bounds of custom, betrays, in a disgraceful 
outbreak, its own hideousness, which was concealed under the cover of 
prevailing fashions.</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 13. Same subject, continued" prev="xiii_2" next="xv_2" id="xiv_2">

<h3 id="xiv_2-p0.1">Chapter 13</h3>
<p class="par" id="xiv_2-p1">21. Whatever, then, is in accordance with the habits of those with whom we are 
either compelled by necessity, or undertake as a matter of duty, to spend this 
life, is to be turned by good and great men to some prudent or benevolent end, 
either directly, as is our duty, or figuratively, as is allowable to prophets.</p>

</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 14. Error of those who think that there is no absolute right and wrong" prev="xiv_2" next="xvi_2" id="xv_2">

<h3 id="xv_2-p0.1">Chapter 14</h3>
<p class="par" id="xv_2-p1">22. But when men unacquainted with other modes of life than their own meet 
with the record of such actions, unless they are restrained by authority, they 
look upon them as sins, and do not consider that their own customs either in 
regard to marriage, or feasts, or dress, or the other necessities and 
adornments of human life, appear sinful to the people of other nations and 
other times. And, distracted by this endless variety of customs, some who were 
half asleep (as I may say)—that is, who were neither sunk in the deep sleep 
of folly, nor were able to awake into the light of wisdom—have thought that 
there was no such thing as absolute right, but that every nation took its own 
custom for right; and that, since every nation has a different custom, and 
right must remain unchangeable, it becomes manifest that there is no such 
thing as right at all. Such men did not perceive, to take only one example, 
that the precept, "Whatsoever ye would that men should do to you, do ye even 
so to them," I cannot be altered by any diversity of national customs. And 
this precept, when it is referred to the love of God, destroys all vices; when 
to the love of one's neighbour, puts an end to all crimes. For no one is 
willing to defile his own dwelling; he ought not, therefore, to defile the 
dwelling of God, that is, himself. And no one wishes an injury to be done him 
by another; he himself, therefore, ought not to do injury to another.</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 15. Rule for interpreting figurative expressions" prev="xv_2" next="xvii_2" id="xvi_2">

<h3 id="xvi_2-p0.1">Chapter 15</h3>
<p class="par" id="xvi_2-p1">23. The tyranny of lust being thus overthrown, charity reigns through its 
supremely just laws of love to God for His own sake, and love to one's self 
and one's neighbour for God's sake. Accordingly, in regard to figurative 
expressions, a rule such as the following will be observed, to carefully turn 
over in our minds and meditate upon what we read till an interpretation be 
found that tends to establish the reign of love. Now, if when taken literally 
it at once gives a meaning of this kind, the expression is not to be 
considered figurative.</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 16. Rule for interpreting commands and prohibitions" prev="xvi_2" next="xviii_2" id="xvii_2">

<h3 id="xvii_2-p0.1">Chapter 16</h3>
<p class="par" id="xvii_2-p1">24. If the sentence is one of command, either forbidding a crime or vice, or 
enjoining an act of prudence or benevolence, it is not figurative. If, 
however, it seems to enjoin a crime or vice, or to forbid an act of prudence 
or benevolence, it is figurative. "Except ye eat the flesh of the Son of man," 
says Christ, "and drink His blood, ye have no life in you." This seems to 
enjoin a crime or a vice; it is therefore a figure, enjoining that we should 
have a share in the sufferings of our Lord, and that we should retain a sweet 
and profitable memory of the fact that His flesh was wounded and crucified for 
us. Scripture says: "If thine enemy hunger, feed him; if he thirst, give him 
drink;" and this is beyond doubt a command to do a kindness. But in what 
follows, "for in so doing thou shalt heap coals of fire on his head," one 
would think a deed of malevolence was enjoined. Do not doubt, then, that the 
expression is figurative; and, while it is possible to interpret it in two 
ways, one pointing to the doing of an injury, the other to a display of 
superiority, let charity on the contrary call you back to benevolence, and 
interpret the coals of fire as the burning groans of penitence by which a 
man's pride is cured who bewails that he has been the enemy of one who came to 
his assistance in distress. In the same way, when our Lord says, "He who 
loveth his life shall lose it," we are not to think that He forbids the 
prudence with which it is a man's duty to care for his life, but that He says 
in a figurative sense, "Let him lose his life"—that is, let him destroy and 
lose that perverted and unnatural use which he now makes of his life, and 
through which his desires are fixed on temporal things so that he gives no 
heed to eternal. It is written: "Give to the godly man, and help not a 
sinner." The latter clause of this sentence seems to forbid benevolence; for 
it says, "help not a sinner." Understand, therefore, that "sinner" is put 
figuratively for sin, so that it is his sin you are not to help.</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 17. Some commands are given to all in common, others to particular classes" prev="xvii_2" next="xix_2" id="xviii_2">

<h3 id="xviii_2-p0.1">Chapter 17</h3>
<p class="par" id="xviii_2-p1">25. Again, it often happens that a man who has attained, or thinks he has 
attained, to a higher grade of spiritual life, thinks that the commands given 
to those who are still in the lower grades are figurative; for example, if he 
has embraced a life of celibacy and made himself a eunuch for the kingdom of 
heaven's sake, he contends that the commands given in Scripture about loving 
and ruling a wife are not to be taken literally, but figuratively; and if he 
has determined to keep his virgin unmarried, he tries to put a figurative 
interpretation on the passage where it is said, "Marry thy daughter, and so 
shalt thou have performed a weighty matter." Accordingly, another of our rules 
for understanding the Scriptures will be as follows,—to recognize that some 
commands are given to all in common, others to particular classes of persons, 
that the medicine may act not only upon the state of health as a whole, but 
also upon the special weakness of each member. For that which cannot be raised 
to a higher state must be cared for in its own state.</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 18. We must take into consideration the time at which anything was enjoyed or allowed" prev="xviii_2" next="xx_2" id="xix_2">

<h3 id="xix_2-p0.1">Chapter 18</h3>
<p class="par" id="xix_2-p1">26. We must also be on our guard against supposing that what in the Old 
Testament, making allowance for the condition of those times, is not a crime 
or a vice even if we take it literally and not figuratively, can be 
transferred to the present time as a habit of life. For no one will do this 
except lust has dominion over him, and endeavours to find support for itself 
in the very Scriptures which were intended to overthrow it. And the wretched 
man does not perceive that such matters are recorded with this useful design, 
that mere of good hope may learn the salutary lesson, both that the custom 
they spurn can be turned to a good use, and that which they embrace can be 
used to condemnation, if the use of the former be accompanied with charity, 
and the use of the latter with lust.</p>

<p class="par" id="xix_2-p2">27. For, if it was possible for one man to use many wives with chastity, it is 
possible for another to use one wife with lust. And I look with greater 
approval on the man who uses the fruitfulness of many wives for the sake of an 
ulterior object, than on the man who enjoys the body of one wife for its own 
sake. For in the former case the man aims at a useful object suited to the 
circumstances of the times; in the latter case he gratifies a lust which is 
engrossed in temporal enjoyments. And those men to whom the apostle permitted 
as a matter of indulgence to have one wife because of their incontinence, were 
less near to God than those who, though they had each of them numerous wives, 
yet just as a wise man uses food and drink only for the sake of bodily health, 
used marriage only for the sake of offspring. And, accordingly, if these last 
had been still alive at the advent of our Lord, when the time not of casting 
stones away but of gathering them together had come, they would have 
immediately made themselves eunuchs for the kingdom of heaven's sake. For 
there is no difficulty in abstaining unless when there is lust in enjoying. 
And assuredly those men of whom I speak knew that wantonness even in regard to 
wives is abuse and intemperance, as is proved by Tobit's prayer when he was 
married to his wife. For he says: "Blessed art Thou, O God of our fathers, and 
blessed is Thy holy and glorious name for ever; let the heavens bless Thee, 
and all Thy creatures. Thou merriest Adam, and gavest him Eve his wife for an 
helper and stay. . . . And now, O Lord. Thou knowest that I take not this my 
sister for lust, but uprightly: therefore have pity on us, O Lord."</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 19. Wicked men judge others by themselves" prev="xix_2" next="xxi_2" id="xx_2">

<h3 id="xx_2-p0.1">Chapter 19</h3>
<p class="par" id="xx_2-p1">28. But those who, giving the rein to lust, either wander about steeping 
themselves in a multitude of debaucheries, or even in regard to one wife not 
only exceed the measure necessary for the procreation of children, but with 
the shameless license of a sort of slavish freedom heap up the filth of a 
still more beastly excess, such men do not believe it possible that the men of 
ancient times used a number of wives with temperance, looking to nothing but 
the duty, necessary in the circumstances of the time, of propagating the race; 
and what they themselves, who are entangled in the meshes of lust, do not 
accomplish in the case of a single wife, they think utterly impossible in the 
case of a number of wives.</p>

<p class="par" id="xx_2-p2">29. But these same men might say that it is not right even to honour and 
praise good and holy men, because they themselves when they are honoured and 
praised, swell with pride, becoming the more eager for the emptiest sort of 
distinction the more frequently and the more widely they are blown about on 
the tongue of flattery, and so become so light that a breath of rumour, 
whether it appear prosperous or adverse, will carry them into the whirlpool of 
vice or dash them on the rocks of crime. Let them, then, learn how trying and 
difficult it is for themselves to escape either being caught by the bait of 
praise, or pierced by the stings of insult; but let them not measure others by 
their own standard.</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 20. Consistency of good men in all outward circumstances" prev="xx_2" next="xxii_2" id="xxi_2">
<h3 id="xxi_2-p0.1">Chapter 20</h3>
<p class="Body" id="xxi_2-p1">Let them believe, on the contrary, that the apostles of our faith were 
neither puffed up when they were honoured by men, nor cast down when they were 
despised. And certainly neither sort of temptation was wanting to those great 
men. For they were both cried up by the loud praises of believers, and cried 
down by the slanderous reports of their persecutors. But the apostles used all 
these things, as occasion served, and were not corrupted; and in the same way 
the saints of old used their wives with reference to the necessities of their 
own times, and were not in bondage to lust as they are who refuse to believe 
these things.</p>

<p class="par" id="xxi_2-p2">30. For if they had been under the influence of any such passion, they could 
never have restrained themselves from implacable hatred towards their sons, by 
whom they knew that their wives and concubines were solicited and debauched.</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 21. David not lustful, though he fell into adultery" prev="xxi_2" next="xxiii_2" id="xxii_2">
<h3 id="xxii_2-p0.1">Chapter 21</h3>
<p class="Body" id="xxii_2-p1">But when King David had suffered this injury at the hands of his impious 
and unnatural son, he not only bore with him in his mad passion, but mourned 
over him in his death. He certainly was not caught in the meshes of carnal 
jealousy, seeing that it was not his own injuries but the sins of his son that 
moved him. For it was on this account he had given orders that his son should 
not be slain if he were conquered in battle, that he might have a place of 
repentance after he was subdued; and when he was baffled in this design, he 
mourned over his son's death, not because of his own loss, but because he knew 
to what punishment so impious an adulterer and parricide had been hurried. For 
prior to this, in the case of another son who had been guilty of no crime, 
though he was dreadfully afflicted for him while he was sick, yet he comforted 
himself after his death.</p>

<p class="par" id="xxii_2-p2">31. And with what moderation and self-restraint those men used their wives 
appears chiefly in this, that when this same king, carried away by the heat of 
passion and by temporal prosperity, had taken unlawful possession of one 
woman, whose husband also he ordered to be put to death, he was accused of his 
crime by a prophet, who, when he had come to show him his sin set before him 
the parable of the poor man who had but one ewe-lamb, and whose neighbour, 
though he had many, yet when a guest came to him spared to take of his own 
flock, but set his poor neighbour's one lamb before his guest to eat. And 
David's anger being kindled against the man, he commanded that he should be 
put to death, and the lamb restored fourfold to the poor man; thus unwittingly 
condemning the sin he had wittingly committed. And when he had been shown 
this, and God's punishment had been denounced against him, he wiped out his 
sin in deep penitence. But yet in this parable it was the adultery only that 
was indicated by the poor man's ewe-lamb; about the killing of the woman's 
husband,—that is, about the murder of the poor man himself who had the one 
ewe-lamb,—nothing is said in the parable, so that the sentence of 
condemnation is pronounced against the adultery alone. And hence we may 
understand with what temperance he possessed a number of wives when he was 
forced to punish himself for transgressing in regard to one woman. But in his 
case the immoderate desire did not take up its abode with him, but was only a 
passing guest. On this account the unlawful appetite is called even by the 
accusing prophet, a guest. For he did not say that he took the poor man's 
ewe-lamb to make a feast for his king, but for his guest. In the case of his 
son Solomon, however, this lust did not come and pass away like a guest, but 
reigned as a king. And about him Scripture is not silent, but accuses him of 
being a lover of strange women; for in the beginning of his reign he was 
inflamed with a desire for wisdom, but after he had attained it through 
spiritual love, he lost it through carnal lust.</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 22. Rule regarding passages of Scripture in which approval is expressed of actions which are now condemned by good men" prev="xxii_2" next="xxiv_2" id="xxiii_2">

<h3 id="xxiii_2-p0.1">Chapter 22</h3>
<p class="par" id="xxiii_2-p1">32. Therefore, although all, or nearly all, the transactions recorded in the 
Old Testament are to be taken not literally only, but figuratively as well, 
nevertheless even in the case of those which the reader has taken literally, 
and which, though the authors of them are praised, are repugnant to the habits 
of the good men who since our Lord's advent are the custodians of the divine 
commands, let him refer the figure to its interpretation, but let him not 
transfer the act to his habits of life. For many things which were done as 
duties at that time, cannot now be done except through lust.</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 23. Rule regarding the narrative of sins of great men" prev="xxiii_2" next="xxv_2" id="xxiv_2">

<h3 id="xxiv_2-p0.1">Chapter 23</h3>
<p class="par" id="xxiv_2-p1">33. And when he reads of the sins of great men, although he may be able to see 
and to trace out in them a figure of things to come, let him yet put the 
literal fact to this use also, to teach him not to dare to vaunt himself in 
his own good deeds, and in comparison with his own righteousness, to despise 
others as sinners, when he sees in the case of men so eminent both the storms 
that are to be avoided and the shipwrecks that are to be wept over. For the 
sins of these men were recorded to this end, that men might everywhere and 
always tremble at that saying of the apostle: "Wherefore let him that thinketh 
he standeth take heed lest he fall." For there is hardly a page of Scripture 
on which it is not clearly written that God resisteth the proud and giveth 
grace to the humble.</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 24. The character of the expressions used is above all to have weight" prev="xxiv_2" next="xxvi_2" id="xxv_2">

<h3 id="xxv_2-p0.1">Chapter 24</h3>
<p class="par" id="xxv_2-p1">34. The chief thing to be inquired into, therefore, in regard to any 
expression that we are trying to understand is, whether it is literal or 
figurative. For when it is ascertained to be figurative, it is easy, by an 
application of the laws of things which we discussed in the first book, to 
turn it in every way until we arrive at a true interpretation, especially when 
we bring to our aid experience strengthened by the exercise of piety. Now we 
find out whether an expression is literal or figurative by attending to the 
considerations indicated above.</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 25. The same word does not always signify the same thing" prev="xxv_2" next="xxvii_2" id="xxvi_2">
<h3 id="xxvi_2-p0.1">Chapter 25</h3>
<p class="Body" id="xxvi_2-p1">And when it is shown to be figurative, the words in which it is expressed 
will be found to be drawn either from like objects or from objects having some 
affinity.</p>

<p class="par" id="xxvi_2-p2">35. But as there are many ways in which things show a likeness to each other, 
we are not to suppose there is any rule that what a thing signifies by 
similitude in one place it is to be taken to signify in all other places. For 
our Lord used leaven both in a bad sense, as when He said, "Beware of the 
leaven of the Pharisees," I and in a good sense, as when He said, "The kingdom 
of heaven is like unto leaven, which a woman took and hid in three measures of 
meal, till the whole was leavened."</p>

<p class="par" id="xxvi_2-p3">36. Now the rule in regard to this variation has two forms. For things that 
signify now one thing and now another, signify either things that are 
contrary, or things that are only different. They signify contraries, for 
example, when they are used metaphorically at one time in a good sense, at 
another in a bad, as in the case of the leaven mentioned above. Another 
example of the same is that a lion stands for Christ in the place where it is 
said, "The lion of the tribe of Judah has prevailed;" and again, stands for 
the devil where it is written, "Your adversary the devil, as a roaring lion, 
walketh about seeking whom he may devour." In the same way the serpent is used 
in a good sense, "Be wise as serpents;" and again, in a bad sense, "The 
serpent beguiled Eve through his subtilty." Bread is used in a good sense, "I 
am the living bread which came down from heaven;" in a bad, "Bread eaten in 
secret is pleasant." And so in a great many other case. The examples I have 
adduced are indeed by no means doubtful in their signification, because only 
plain instances ought to be used as examples. There are passages, however, in 
regard to which it is uncertain in what sense they ought to be taken, as for 
example, "In the hand of the Lord there is a cup, and the wine is red: it is 
full of mixture." Now it is uncertain whether this denotes the wrath of God, 
but not to the last extremity of punishment, that is, "to the very dregs;" or 
whether it denotes the grace of the Scriptures passing away from the Jews and 
coming to the Gentiles, because "He has put down one and set up 
another,"—certain observances, however, which they understand in a carnal 
manner, still remaining among the Jews, for "the dregs hereof is not yet wrung 
out." The following is an example of the same object being taken, not in 
opposite, but only in different significations: water denotes people, as we 
read in the Apocalypse, and also the Holy Spirit, as for example, "Out of his 
belly shall flow rivers of living water;" and many other things besides water 
must be interpreted according to the place in which they are found.</p>

<p class="par" id="xxvi_2-p4">37. And in the same way other objects are not single in their signification, 
but each one of them denotes not two only but sometimes even several different 
things, according to the connection in which it is found.</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 26. Obscure passages are to be interpreted by those which are clearer" prev="xxvi_2" next="xxviii_2" id="xxvii_2">
<h3 id="xxvii_2-p0.1">Chapter 26</h3>
<p class="Body" id="xxvii_2-p1">Now from the places where the sense in which they are used is more manifest 
we must gather the sense in which they are to be understood in obscure 
passages. For example, there is no better way of understanding the words 
addressed to God, "Take hold of shield and buckler and stand up for mine 
help," than by referring to the passage where we read, "Thou, Lord, hast 
crowned us with Thy favour as with a shield." And yet we are not so to 
understand it, as that wherever we meet with a shield put to indicate a 
protection of any kind, we must take it as signifying nothing but the favour 
of God. For we hear also of the shield of faith, "wherewith," says the 
apostle, "ye shall be able to quench all the fiery darts of the wicked." Nor 
ought we, on the other hand, in regard to spiritual armour of this kind to 
assign faith to the shield only; for we read in another place of the 
breastplate of faith: "putting on," says the apostle, "the breastplate of 
faith and love."</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 27. One passage susceptible of various interpretations" prev="xxvii_2" next="xxix_2" id="xxviii_2">

<h3 id="xxviii_2-p0.1">Chapter 27</h3>
<p class="par" id="xxviii_2-p1">38. When, again, not some one interpretation, but two or more interpretations 
are put upon the same words of Scripture, even though the meaning the writer 
intended remain undiscovered, there is no danger if it can be shown from other 
passages of Scripture that any of the interpretations put on the words is in 
harmony with the truth. And if a man in searching the Scriptures endeavours to 
get at the intention of the author through whom the Holy Spirit spake, whether 
he succeeds in this endeavour, or whether he draws a different meaning from 
the words, but one that is not opposed to sound doctrine, he is free from 
blame so long as he is supported by the testimony of some other passage of 
Scripture. For the author perhaps saw that this very meaning lay in the words 
which we are trying to interpret; and assuredly the Holy Spirit, who through 
him spake these words, foresaw that this interpretation would occur to the 
reader, nay, made provision that it should occur to him, seeing that it too is 
founded on truth. For what more liberal and more fruitful provision could God 
have made in regard to the Sacred Scriptures than that the same words might be 
understood in several senses, all of which are sanctioned by the concurring 
testimony of other passages equally divine?</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 28. It is safer to explain a doubtful passage by other passages of Scripture than by reason" prev="xxviii_2" next="xxx_2" id="xxix_2">

<h3 id="xxix_2-p0.1">Chapter 28</h3>
<p class="par" id="xxix_2-p1">39. When, however, a meaning is evolved of such a kind that what is doubtful 
in it cannot be cleared up by indubitable evidence from Scripture, it remains 
for us to make it clear by the evidence of reason. But this is a dangerous 
practice. For it is far safer to walk by the light of Holy Scripture; so that 
when we wish to examine the passages that are obscured by metaphorical 
expressions, we may either obtain a meaning about which there is no 
controversy, or if a controversy arises, may settle it by the application of 
testimonies sought out in every portion of the same Scripture.</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 29. The knowledge of tropes is necessary" prev="xxix_2" next="xxxi_2" id="xxx_2">

<h3 id="xxx_2-p0.1">Chapter 29</h3>
<p class="par" id="xxx_2-p1">40. Moreover, I would have learned men to know that the authors of our 
Scriptures use all those forms of expression which grammarians call by the 
Greek name tropes, and use them more freely and in greater variety than people 
who are unacquainted with the Scriptures, and have learnt these figures of 
speech from other writings, can imagine or believe. Nevertheless those who 
know these tropes recognize them in Scripture, and are very much assisted by 
their knowledge of them in understanding Scripture. But this is not the place 
to teach them to the illiterate, lest it might seem that I was teaching 
grammar. I certainly advise, however, that they be learnt elsewhere, although 
indeed I have already given that advice above, in the second book namely, 
where I treated of the necessary knowledge of languages. For the written 
characters from which grammar itself gets its name (the Greek name for letters 
being "grammata") are the signs of sounds made by the articulate voice with 
which we speak. Now of some of these figures of speech we find in Scripture 
not only examples (which we have of them all), but the very names as well: for 
instance, allegory, enigma, and parable. However, nearly all these tropes 
which are said to be learnt as a matter of liberal education are found even in 
the ordinary speech of men who have learnt no grammar, but are content to use 
the vulgar idiom. For who does not say, "So may you flourish? " And this is 
the figure of speech called metaphor. Who does not speak of a fish-pond in 
which there is no fish, which was not made for fish, and yet gets its name 
from fish? And this is the figure called catachresis.</p>

<p class="par" id="xxx_2-p2">41. It would be tedious to go over all the rest in this way; for the speech of 
the vulgar makes use of them all, even of those more curious figures which 
mean the very opposite of what they say, as for example, those called irony 
and antiphrasis. Now in irony we indicate by the tone of voice the meaning we 
desire to convey; as when we say to a man who is behaving badly, "You are 
doing well." But it is not by the tone of voice that we make an antiphrasis to 
indicate the opposite of what the words convey; but either the words in which 
it is expressed are used in the opposite of their etymological sense, as a 
grove is called <span lang="LA" id="xxx_2-p2.1">lucus</span> from its want of light; or it is customary to use a 
certain form of expression, although it puts yes for no by a law of 
contraries, as when we ask in a place for what is not there, and get the 
answer, "There is plenty;" or we add words that make it plain we mean the 
opposite of what we say, as in the expression, "Beware of him, for he is a 
good man." And what illiterate man is there that does not use such 
expressions, although he knows nothing at all about either the nature or the 
names of these figures of speech? And yet the knowledge of these is necessary 
for clearing up the difficulties of Scripture; because when the words taken 
literally give an absurd meaning, we ought forthwith to inquire whether they 
may not be used in this or that figurative sense which we are unacquainted 
with; and in this way many obscure passages have had light thrown upon them.</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 30. The rules of Tichonius the Donatist examined" prev="xxx_2" next="xxxii_2" id="xxxi_2">

<h3 id="xxxi_2-p0.1">Chapter 30</h3>
<p class="par" id="xxxi_2-p1">42. One Tichonius, who, although a Donatist himself, has written most 
triumphantly against the Donatists (and herein showed himself of a most 
inconsistent disposition, that he was unwilling to give them up altogether), 
wrote a book which he called the Book of Rules, because in it he laid down 
seven rules, which are, as it were, keys to open the secrets of Scripture. And 
of these rules, the first relates to the Lord and His body, the second to the 
twofold division of the Lord's body, the third to the promises and the law, 
the fourth to species and genus, the fifth to times, the sixth to 
recapitulation, the seventh to the devil and his body. Now these rules, as 
expounded by their author, do indeed, when carefully considered, afford 
considerable assistance in penetrating the secrets of the sacred writings; but 
still they do not explain all the difficult passages for there are several 
other methods required which are so far from being embraced in this number of 
seven, that the author himself explains many obscure passages without using 
any of his rules; finding, indeed, that there was no need for them, as there 
was no difficulty in the passage of the kind to which his rules apply. As, for 
example, he inquires what we are to understand in the Apocalypse by the seven 
angels of the churches to whom John is commanded to write; and after much and 
various reasoning, arrives at the conclusion that the angels are the churches 
themselves. And throughout this long and full discussion, although the matter 
inquired into is certainly very obscure, no use whatever is made of the rules. 
This is enough for an example, for it would be too tedious and troublesome to 
collect all the passages in the canonical Scriptures which present obscurities 
of such a kind as require none of these seven rules for their elucidation.</p>

<p class="par" id="xxxi_2-p2">43. The author himself, however, when commending these rules, attributes so 
much value to them that it would appear as if, when they were thoroughly known 
and duly applied, we should be able to interpret all the obscure passages in 
the law—that is, in the sacred books. For he thus commences this very book: 
"Of all the things that occur to me, I consider none so necessary as to write 
a little book of rules, and, as it were, to make keys for, and put windows in, 
the secret places of the law. For there are certain mystical rules which hold 
the key to the secret recesses of the whole law, and render visible the 
treasures of truth that are to many invisible. And if this system of rules be 
received as I communicate it, without jealousy, what is shut shall be laid 
open, and what is obscure shall be elucidated, so that a man travelling 
through the vast forest of prophecy shall, if he follow these rules as 
pathways of light, be preserved from going astray." Now, if he had said, 
"There are certain mystical rules which hold the key to some of the secrets of 
the law," or even "which hold the key to the great secrets of the law," and 
not what he does say, "the secret recesses of the whole law;" and if he had 
not said "What is shut shall be laid open," but, "Many things that are shut 
shall be laid open," he would have said what was true, and he would not, by 
attributing more than is warranted by the facts to his very elaborate and 
useful work, have led the reader into false expectations. And I have thought 
it right to say thus much, in order both that the book may be read by the 
studious (for it is of very great assistance in understanding Scripture), and 
that no more may be expected from it than it really contains. Certainly it 
must be read with caution, not only on account of the errors into which the 
author falls as a man, but chiefly on account of the heresies which he 
advances as a Donatist. And now I shall briefly indicate what these seven 
rules teach or advise.</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 31. The first rule of Tichonius" prev="xxxi_2" next="xxxiii_2" id="xxxii_2">

<h3 id="xxxii_2-p0.1">Chapter 31</h3>
<p class="par" id="xxxii_2-p1">44. The first is about the Lord and His body, and it is this, that, knowing as 
we do that the head and the body—that is, Christ and His Church—are 
sometimes indicated to us under one person (for it is not in vain that it is 
said to believers, "Ye then are Abraham's seed," when there is but one seed of 
Abraham, and that is Christ), we need not be in a difficulty when a transition 
is made from the head to the body or from the body to the head, and yet no 
change made in the person spoken of. For a single person is represented as 
saying, "He has decked me as a bridegroom with ornaments, and adorned me as a 
bride with jewels;" and yet it is, of course, a matter for interpretation 
which of these two refers to the head and which to the body, that is, which to 
Christ and which to the Church.</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 32. The second rule of Tichonius" prev="xxxii_2" next="xxxiv_2" id="xxxiii_2">

<h3 id="xxxiii_2-p0.1">Chapter 32</h3>
<p class="par" id="xxxiii_2-p1">45. The second rule is about the twofold division of the body of the Lord; but 
this indeed is not a suitable name, for that is really no part of the body of 
Christ which will not be with Him in eternity. We ought, therefore, to say 
that the rule is about the true and the mixed body of the Lord, or the true 
and the counterfeit, or some such name; because, not to speak of eternity, 
hypocrites cannot even now be said to be in Him, although they seem to be in 
His Church. And hence this rule might be designated thus: Concerning the mixed 
Church. Now this rule requires the reader to be on his guard when Scripture, 
although it has now come to address or speak of a different set of persons, 
seems to be addressing or speaking of the same persons as before, just as if 
both sets constituted one body in consequence of their being for the time 
united in a common participation of the sacraments. An example of this is that 
passage in the Song of Solomon, "I am black, but comely, as the tents of 
Cedar, as the curtains of Solomon." For it is not said, I *was* black as the 
tents of Cedar, but am *now* comely as the curtains of Solomon. The Church 
declares itself to be at present both; and this because the good fish and the 
bad are for the time mixed up in the one net. For the tents of Cedar pertain 
to Ishmael, who "shall not be heir with the son of the free woman." And in the 
same way, when God says of the good part of the Church, "I will bring the 
blind by a way that they knew not; I will lead them in paths that they have 
not known; I will make darkness light before them, and crooked things 
straight: these things will I do unto them, and not forsake them;" He 
immediately adds in regard to the other part, the bad that is mixed with the 
good, "They shall be turned back." Now these words refer to a set of persons 
altogether different from the former; but as the two sets are for the present 
united in one body, He speaks as if there were no change in the subject of the 
sentence. They will not, however, always he in one body; for one of them is 
that wicked servant of whom we are told in the gospel, whose lord, when he 
comes, "shall cut him asunder and appoint him his portion with the 
hypocrites."</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 33. The third rule of Tichonius" prev="xxxiii_2" next="xxxv_2" id="xxxiv_2">

<h3 id="xxxiv_2-p0.1">Chapter 33</h3>
<p class="par" id="xxxiv_2-p1">46. The third rule relates to the promises and the law, and may be designated 
in other terms as relating to the spirit and the letter, which is the name I 
made use of when writing a book on this subject. It may be also named, of 
grace and the law. This, however, seems to me to be a great question in 
itself, rather than a rule to be applied to the solution of other questions. 
It was the want of clear views on this question that originated, or at least 
greatly aggravated, the Pelagian heresy. And the efforts of Tichonius to clear 
up this point were good, but not complete. For, in discussing the question 
about faith and works, he said that works were given us by God as the reward 
of faith, but that faith itself was so far our own that it did not come to us 
from God; not keeping in mind the saying of the apostle: "Peace be to the 
brethren, and love with faith, from God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ." 
But he had not come into contact with this heresy, which has arisen in our 
time, and has given us much labour and trouble in defending against it the 
grace of God which is through our Lord Jesus Christ and which (according to 
the saying of the apostle, "There must be also heresies among you, that they 
which are approved may be made manifest among you" has made us much more 
watchful and diligent to discover in Scripture what escaped Tichonius, who, 
having no enemy to guard against, was less attentive and anxious on this 
point, namely, that even faith itself is the gift of Him who "has dealt to 
every man the measure of faith." Whence it is said to certain believers: "Unto 
you it is given, in the behalf of Christ, not only to believe on Him, but also 
to suffer for His sake." Who, then, can doubt that each of these is the gift 
of God, when he learns from this passage, and believes, that each of them is 
given? There are many other testimonies besides which prove this. But I am not 
now treating of this doctrine. I have, however, dealt with it, one place or 
another, very frequently.</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 34. The fourth rule of Tichonius" prev="xxxiv_2" next="xxxvi_2" id="xxxv_2">

<h3 id="xxxv_2-p0.1">Chapter 34</h3>
<p class="par" id="xxxv_2-p1">47. The fourth rule of Tichonius is about species and genus. For so he calls 
it, intending that by species should be understood a part, by genus the whole 
of which that which he calls species is a part: as, for example, every single 
city is a part of the great society of nations: the city he calls a species, 
all nations constitute the genus. There is no necessity for here applying that 
subtilty of distinction which is in use among logicians, who discuss with 
great acuteness the difference between a part and a species. The rule is of 
course the same, if anything of the kind referred to is found in Scripture, 
not in regard to a single city, but in regard to a single province, or tribe, 
or kingdom. Not only, for example, about Jerusalem, or some of the cities of 
the Gentiles, such as Tyre or Babylon, are things said in Scripture whose 
significance oversteps the limits of the city, and which are more suitable 
when applied to all nations; but in regard to Judea also, and Egypt, and 
Assyria, or any other nation you choose to take which contains numerous 
cities, but still is not the whole world, but only a part of it, things are 
said which pass over the limits of that particular country, and apply more 
fitly to the whole of which this is a part; or, as our author terms it, to the 
genus of which this is a species. And hence these words have come to be 
commonly known, so that even uneducated people understand what is laid down 
specially, and what generally, in any given Imperial command. The same thing 
occurs in the case of men: things are said of Solomon, for example, the scope 
of which reaches far beyond him, and which are only properly understood when 
applied to Christ and His Church, of which Solomon is a part.</p>

<p class="par" id="xxxv_2-p2">48. Now the species is not always overstepped, for things are often said of 
such a kind as evidently apply to it also, or perhaps even to it exclusively. 
But when Scripture, having up to a certain point been speaking about the 
species, makes a transition at that point from the species to the genus, the 
reader must then be carefully on his guard against seeking in the species what 
he can find much better and more surely in the genus. Take, for example, what 
the prophet Ezekiel says: "When the house of Israel dwelt in their own land, 
they defiled it by their own way, and by their doings: their way was before me 
as the uncleanness of a removed woman. Wherefore I poured my fury upon them 
for the blood that they had shed upon the land, and for their idols wherewith 
they had polluted it: and I scattered them among the heathen, and they were 
dispersed through the countries: according to their way, and according to 
their doings, I judged them." Now it is easy to understand that this applies 
to that house of Israel of which the apostle says "Behold Israel after the 
flesh;" because the people of Israel after the flesh did both perform and 
endure all that is here referred to. What immediately follows, too, may be 
understood as applying to the same peep]e. But when the prophet begins to say, 
"And I will sanctify my great name, which was profaned among the heathen, 
which ye have profaned in the midst of them; and the heathen shall know that I 
am the Lord," the reader ought now carefully to observe the way in which the 
species is overstepped and the genus taken in. For he goes on to say: "And I 
shall be sanctified in you before their eyes. For I will take you from among 
the heathen, and gather you out of all countries, and will bring you into your 
own land. Then will I sprinkle clean water upon you, and ye shall be clean: 
from all your filthiness, and from all your idols, will I cleanse you. A new 
heart also will I give you, and a new spirit will I put within you; and I will 
take away the stony heart out of your flesh and I will give you a heart of 
flesh. And I will put my Spirit within you, and cause you to walk in my 
statutes, and ye shall keep my commandments, and do them. And ye shall dwell 
in the land that I gave to your fathers; and ye shall be my people, and I will 
be your God. I will also save you from all your uncleannesses." Now that this 
is a prophecy of the New Testament, to which pertain not only the remnant of 
that one nation of which it is elsewhere said, "For though the number of the 
children of Israel be as the sand of the sea, yet a remnant of them shall be 
saved," but also the other nations which were promised to their fathers and 
our fathers; and that there is here a promise of that washing of regeneration 
which, as we see, is now imparted to all nations, no one who looks into the 
matter can doubt. And that saying of the apostle, when he is commending the 
grace of the New Testament and its excellence in comparison with the Old, "Ye 
are our epistle . . . written not with ink, but with the Spirit of the living 
God; not in tables of stone, but in fleshy tables of the heart," has an 
evident reference to this place where the prophet says, "A new heart also will 
I give you, and a new spirit will I put within you; and I will take away the 
stony heart out of your flesh, and I will give you an heart of flesh." Now the 
heart of flesh from which the apostle's expression, "the fleshy tables of the 
heart," is drawn, the prophet intended to point out as distinguished from the 
stony heart by the possession of sentient life; and by sentient he understood 
intelligent life. And thus the spiritual Israel is made up, not of one nation, 
but of all the nations which were promised to the fathers in their seed, that 
is, in Christ.</p>

<p class="par" id="xxxv_2-p3">49. This spiritual Israel, therefore, is distinguished from the carnal Israel 
which is of one nation, by newness of grace, not by nobility of descent, in 
feeling, not in race; but the prophet, in his depth of meaning, while speaking 
of the carnal Israel, passes on, without indicating the transition, to speak 
of the spiritual, and although now speaking of the latter, seems to be still 
speaking of the former; not that he grudges us the clear apprehension of 
Scripture, as if we were enemies, but that he deals with us as a physician, 
giving us a wholesome exercise for our spirit. And therefore we ought to take 
this saying "And I will bring you into your own land," and what he says 
shortly afterwards, as if repeating himself, "And ye shall dwell in the land 
that I gave to your fathers," not literally, as if they referred to Israel 
after the flesh but spiritually, as referring to the spiritual Israel. For the 
Church, without spot or wrinkle, gathered out of all nations, and destined to 
reign forever with Christ, is itself the land of the blessed, the land of the 
living; and we are to understand that this was given to the fathers when it 
was promised to them in the sure and immutable purpose of God; for what the 
fathers believed would be given in its own time was to them, on account of the 
unchangeableness of the promise and purpose, the same as if it were already 
given; just as the apostle, writing to Timothy, speaks of the grace which is 
given to the saints: "Not according to our works, but according to His own 
purpose and grace, which was given us in Christ Jesus before the world began; 
but is now made manifest by the appearing of our Saviour." He speaks of the 
grace as given at a time when those to whom it was to be given were not yet in 
existence; because he looks upon that as having been already done in the 
arrangement and purpose of God, which was to take place in its own time, and 
he himself speaks of it as now made manifest. It is possible, however, that 
these words may refer to the land of the age to come, when there will be a new 
heaven and a new earth, wherein the unrighteous shall be unable to dwell. And 
so it is truly said to the righteous, that the land itself is theirs, no part 
of which will belong to the unrighteous; because it is the same as if it were 
itself given, when it is firmly settled that it shall be given.</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 35. The fifth rule of Tichonius" prev="xxxv_2" next="xxxvii_2" id="xxxvi_2">

<h3 id="xxxvi_2-p0.1">Chapter 35</h3>
<p class="par" id="xxxvi_2-p1">50. The fifth rule Tichonius lays down is one he designates of times,—a rule 
by which we can frequently discover or conjecture quantities of time which are 
not expressly mentioned in Scripture. And he says that this rule applies in 
two ways: either to the figure of speech called synecdoche, or to legitimate 
numbers. The figure synecdoche either puts the part for the whole, or the 
whole for the part. As, for example, in reference to the time when, in the 
presence of only three of His disciples, our Lord was transfigured on the 
mount, so that His face shone as the sun, and His raiment was white as snow, 
one evangelist says that this event occurred "after eight days," while another 
says that it occurred "after six days." Now both of these statements about the 
number of days cannot be true, unless we suppose that the writer who says 
"after eight days," counted the latter part of the day on which Christ uttered 
the prediction and the first part of the day on which he showed its fulfilment 
as two whole days; while the writer who says "after six days," counted only 
the whole unbroken days between these two. This figure of speech, which puts 
the part for the whole, explains also the great question about the 
resurrection of Christ. For unless to the latter part of the day on which He 
suffered we join the previous night, and count it as a whole day, and to the 
latter part of the night in which He arose we join the Lord's day which was 
just dawning, and count it also a whole day, we cannot make out the three days 
and three nights during which He foretold that He would be in the heart of the 
earth.</p>

<p class="par" id="xxxvi_2-p2">51. In the next place, our author calls those numbers legitimate which Holy 
Scripture more highly favours, such as seven, or ten, or twelve, or any of the 
other numbers which the diligent reader of Scripture soon comes to know. Now 
numbers of this sort are often put for time universal; as, for example, "Seven 
times in the day do I praise Thee," means just the same as "His praise shall 
continually be in my mouth." And their force is exactly the same, either when 
multiplied by ten, as seventy and seven hundred (whence the seventy years 
mentioned in Jeremiah may be taken in a spiritual sense for the whole time 
during which the Church is a sojourner among aliens); or when multiplied into 
themselves, as ten into ten gives one hundred, and twelve into twelve gives 
one hundred and forty-four, which last number is used in the Apocalypse to 
signify the whole body of the saints. Hence it appears that it is not merely 
questions about times that are to be settled by these numbers, but that their 
significance is of much wider application, and extends to many subjects. That 
number in the Apocalypse, for example, mentioned above, has not reference to 
times, but to men.</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 36. The sixth rule of Tichonius" prev="xxxvi_2" next="xxxviii_2" id="xxxvii_2">

<h3 id="xxxvii_2-p0.1">Chapter 36</h3>
<p class="par" id="xxxvii_2-p1">52. The sixth rule Tichonius calls the recapitulation, which, with sufficient 
watchfulness, is discovered in difficult parts of Scripture. For certain 
occurrences are so related, that the narrative appears to be following the 
order of time, or the continuity of events, when it really goes back without 
mentioning it to previous occurrences, which had been passed over in their 
proper place. And we make mistakes if we do not understand this, from applying 
the rule here spoken of. For example, in the book of Genesis we read, "And the 
Lord God planted a garden eastwards in Eden; and there He put the man whom He 
had formed. And out of the ground made the Lord God to grow every tree that is 
pleasant to the sight, and good for food." Now here it seems to be indicated 
that the events last mentioned took place after God had formed man and put him 
in the garden; whereas the fact is, that the two events having been briefly 
mentioned, viz., that God planted a garden, and there put the man whom He had 
formed, the narrative goes back, by way of recapitulation, to tell what had 
before been omitted, the way in which the garden was planted: that out of the 
ground God made to grow every tree that is pleasant to the sight, and good for 
food. Here there follows "The tree of life also was in the midst of the 
garden, and the tree of knowledge of good and evil." Next the river is 
mentioned which watered the garden, and which was parted into four heads, the 
sources of four streams; and all this has reference to the arrangements of the 
garden. And when this is finished, there is a repetition of the fact which had 
been already told, but which in the strict order of events came after all 
this: "And the Lord God took the man, and put him into the garden of Eden." 
For it was after all these other things were done that man was put in the 
garden, as now appears from the order of the narrative itself: it was not 
after man was put there that the other things were done, as the previous 
statement might be thought to imply, did we not accurately mark and understand 
the recapitulation by which the narrative reverts to what had previously been 
passed over.</p>

<p class="par" id="xxxvii_2-p2">53. In the same book, again, when the generations of the sons of Noah are 
recounted, it is said: "These are the sons of Ham, after their families, after 
their tongues, in their countries, and in their nations." And, again, when the 
sons of Shem are enumerated: "These are the sons of Shem, after their 
families, after their tongues, in their lands, after their nations." And it is 
added in reference to them all: "These are the families of the sons of Noah, 
after their generations, in their nations; and by these were the nations 
divided in the earth after the flood. And the whole earth was of one language 
and of one speech." Now the addition of this sentence, "And the whole earth 
was of one language and of one speech," seems to indicate that at the time 
when the nations were scattered over the earth they had all one language in 
common; but this is evidently inconsistent with the previous words, in their 
families, after their tongues." For each family or nation could not be said to 
have its own language if all had one language in common. And so it is by way 
of recapitulation it is added, "And the whole earth was of one language and of 
one speech," the narrative here going back, without indicating the change, to 
tell how it was, that from having one language in common, the nations were 
divided into a multitude of tongues. And, accordingly, we are forthwith told 
of the building of the tower, and of this punishment being there laid upon 
them as the judgment of God upon their arrogance; and it was after this that 
they were scattered over the earth according to their tongues.</p>

<p class="par" id="xxxvii_2-p3">54. This recapitulation is found in a still more obscure form; as, for 
example, our Lord says in the gospel: "The same day that Lot went out of Sodom 
it rained fire from heaven, and destroyed them all. Even thus shall it be in 
the day when the Son of man is revealed. In that day, he which shall be upon 
the housetop, and his stuff in the house, let him not come down to take it 
away; and he that is in the field, let him likewise not return back. Remember 
Lot's wife." Is it when our Lord shall have been revealed that men are to give 
heed to these sayings, and not to look behind them, that is, not to long after 
the past life which they have renounced? Is not the present rather the time to 
give heed to them, that when the Lord shall have been revealed every man may 
receive his reward according to the things he has given heed to or despised? 
And yet because Scripture says, "In that day," the time of the revelation of 
the Lord will be thought the time for giving heed to these sayings, unless the 
reader be watchful and intelligent so as to understand the recapitulation, in 
which he will be assisted by that other passage of Scripture which even in the 
time of the apostles proclaimed: "Little children, it is the last time." The 
very time then when the gospel is preached, up to the time that the Lord shall 
be revealed. is the day in which men ought to give heed to these sayings: for 
to the same day, which shall be brought to a close by a day of judgment, 
belongs that very revelation of the Lord here spoken of.</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 37. The seventh rule of Tichonius" prev="xxxvii_2" next="iv.v" id="xxxviii_2">

<h3 id="xxxviii_2-p0.1">Chapter 37</h3>
<p class="par" id="xxxviii_2-p1">55. The seventh rule of Tichonius and the last, is about the devil and his 
body. For he is the head of the wicked, who are in a sense his body, and 
destined to go with him into the punishment of everlasting fire, just as 
Christ is the head of the Church, which is His body, destined to be with Him 
in His eternal kingdom and glory. Accordingly, as the first rule, which is 
called of the Lord and His body, directs us, when Scripture speaks of one and 
the same person, to take pains to understand which part of the statement 
applies to the head and which to the body; so this last rule shows us that 
statements are sometimes made about the devil, whose truth is not so evident 
in regard to himself as in regard to his body; and his body is made up not 
only of those who are manifestly out of the way, but of those also who, though 
they really belong to him, are for a time mixed up with the Church, until they 
depart from this life, or until the chaff is separated from the wheat at the 
last great winnowing. For example, what is said in Isaiah, "How he is fallen 
from heaven, Lucifer, son of the morning! " and the other statements of the 
context which, under the figure of the king of Babylon, are made about the 
same person, are of course to be understood of the devil; and yet the 
statement which is made in the same place, "He is ground down on the earth, 
who sendeth to all nations," does not altogether fitly apply to the head 
himself. For, although the devil sends his angels to all nations, yet it is 
his body, not himself, that is ground down on the earth, except that he 
himself is in his body, which is beaten small like the dust which the wind 
blows from the face of the earth.</p>

<p class="par" id="xxxviii_2-p2">56. Now all these rules, except the one about the promises and the law, make 
one meaning to be understood where another is expressed, which is the 
peculiarity of figurative diction; and this kind of diction, it seems to me, 
is too widely spread to be comprehended in its full extent by any one. For, 
wherever one thing is said with the intention that another should be 
understood we have a figurative expression, even though the name of the trope 
is not to be found in the art of rhetoric. And when an expression of this sort 
occurs where it is customary to find it, there is no trouble in understanding 
it; when it occurs, however, where it is not customary, it costs labour to 
understand it, from some more, from some less, just as men have got more or 
less from God of the gifts of intellect, or as they have access to more or 
fewer external helps. And, as in the case of proper words which I discussed 
above, and in which things are to be understood just as they are expressed, so 
in the case of figurative words, in which one thing is expressed and another 
is to be understood, and which I have just finished speaking of as much as I 
thought enough, students of these venerable documents ought to be counselled 
not only to make themselves acquainted with the forms of expression ordinarily 
used in Scripture, to observe them carefully, and to remember them accurately, 
but also, what is especially and before all things necessary, to pray that 
they may understand them. For in these very books on the study of which they 
are intent, they read, "The Lord giveth wisdom: out of His mouth comets 
knowledge and understanding;" and it is from Him they have received their very 
desire for knowledge, if it is wedded to piety. But about signs, so far as 
relates to words, I have now said enough. It remains to discuss, in the 
following book, so far as God has given me light, the means of communicating 
our thoughts to others.</p></div3>

</div2>

<div2 type="book" title="Book IV. Containing a General View of the Subjects Treated in Holy Scripture" progress="69.72%" prev="xxxviii_2" next="iv.v.i" id="iv.v">

<div3 title="Argument." prev="iv.v" next="iv.v.ii" id="iv.v.i">
<p class="Body" id="iv.v.i-p1"><i>Passing to the second part of his work, that which treats of 
expression, the author premises that it is no part of his intention to write a 
treatise on the laws of rhetoric. These can be learned elsewhere, and ought 
not to be neglected, being indeed specially necessary for the Christian 
teacher, whom it behoves to excel in eloquence and power of speech. After 
detailing with much care and minuteness the various qualities of an orator, he 
recommends the authors of the Holy Scriptures as the best models of eloquence, 
far excelling all others in the combination of eloquence with wisdom. He 
points out that perspicuity is the most essential quality of style, and ought 
to be cultivated with especial care by the teacher, as it is the main 
requisite for instruction, although other qualities are required for 
delighting and persuading the hearer. All these gifts are to be sought in 
earnest prayer from God, though we are not to forget to be zealous and 
diligent in study. He shows that there are three species of style,—the 
subdued, the elegant, and the majestic; the first serving for instruction, the 
second for praise, and the third for exhortation: and of each of these he 
gives examples, selected both from Scripture and from early teachers of the 
Church, Cyprian and Ambrose. He shows that these various styles may be 
mingled, and when and for what purposes they are mingled; and that they all 
have the same end in view, to bring home the truth to the hearer, so that he 
may understand it, hear it with gladness, and practice it in his life. 
Finally, he exhorts the Christian teacher himself, pointing out the dignity 
and responsibility of the office he holds, to lead a life in harmony with his 
own teaching, and to show a good example to all. </i></p>


</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 1.This work not intended as a treatise on rhetoric" prev="iv.v.i" next="iv.v.iii" id="iv.v.ii">
<h3 id="iv.v.ii-p0.1">Chapter 1</h3>

<p class="par" id="iv.v.ii-p1">1. This work of mine, which is entitled <i>On Christian Doctrine</i>, was at 
the commencement divided into two parts. For, after a preface, in which I 
answered by anticipation those who were likely to take exception to the work, 
I said, "There are two things on which all interpretation of Scripture 
depends: the mode of ascertaining the proper meaning, and the mode of making 
known the meaning when it is ascertained. I shall treat first of the mode of 
ascertaining, next of the mode of making known the meaning." As, then, I have 
already said a great deal about the mode of ascertaining the meaning, and have 
given three books to this one part of the subject, I shall only say a few 
things about the mode of making known the meaning, in order if possible to 
bring them all within the compass of one book, and so finish the whole work in 
four books.</p>

<p class="par" id="iv.v.ii-p2">2. In the first place, then, I wish by this preamble to put a stop to the 
expectations of readers who may think that I am about to lay down rules of 
rhetoric such as I have learnt, and taught too, in the secular schools, and to 
warn them that they need not look for any such from me. Not that I think such 
rules of no use, but that whatever use they have is to be learnt elsewhere; 
and if any good man should happen to have leisure for learning them, he is not 
to ask me to teach them either in this work or any other.</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 2. It is lawful for a Christian teacher to use the art of rhetoric" prev="iv.v.ii" next="iv.v.iv" id="iv.v.iii">

<h3 id="iv.v.iii-p0.1">Chapter 2</h3>
<p class="par" id="iv.v.iii-p1">3. Now, the art of rhetoric being available for the enforcing either of truth 
or falsehood, who will dare to say that truth in the person of its defenders 
is to take its stand unarmed against falsehood? For example, that those who 
are trying to persuade men of what is false are to know how to introduce their 
subject, so as to put the hearer into a friendly, or attentive, or teachable 
frame of mind, while the defenders of the truth shall be ignorant of that art? 
That the former are to tell their falsehoods briefly, clearly, and plausibly, 
while the latter shall tell the truth in such a way that it is tedious to 
listen to, hard to understand, and, in fine, not easy to believe it? That the 
former are to oppose the truth and defend falsehood with sophistical 
arguments, while the latter shall be unable either to defend what is true, or 
to refute what is false? That the former, while imbuing the minds of their 
hearers with erroneous opinions, are by their power of speech to awe, to melt, 
to enliven, and to rouse them, while the latter shall in defense of the truth 
be sluggish, and frigid, and somnolent? Who is such a fool as to think this 
wisdom? Since, then, the faculty of eloquence is available for both sides, and 
is of very great service in the enforcing either of wrong or right, why do not 
good men study to engage it on the side of truth, when bad men use it to 
obtain the triumph of wicked and worthless causes, and to further injustice 
and error?</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 3. The proper age and the proper means for acquiring  rhetorical skill" prev="iv.v.iii" next="v_3" id="iv.v.iv">

<h3 id="iv.v.iv-p0.1">Chapter 3</h3>
<p class="par" id="iv.v.iv-p1">4. But the theories and rules on this subject (to which, when you add a 
tongue thoroughly skilled by exercise and habit in the use of many words and 
many ornaments of speech, you have what is called eloquence or oratory) may be 
learnt apart from these writings of mine, if a suitable space of time be set 
aside for the purpose at a fit and proper age. But only by those who can learn 
them quickly; for the masters of Roman eloquence themselves did not shrink 
from sayings any one who cannot learn this art quickly can never thoroughly 
learn it at all. Whether this be true or not, why need we inquire? For even if 
this art can occasionally be in the end mastered by men of slower intellect, I 
do not think it of so much importance as to wish men who have arrived at 
mature age to spend time in learning it. It is enough that boys should give 
attention to it; and even of these, not all who are to be fitted for 
usefulness in the Church, but only those who are not yet engaged in any 
occupation of more urgent necessity, or which ought evidently to take 
precedence of it. For men of quick intellect and glowing temperament find it 
easier to become eloquent by reading and listening to eloquent speakers than 
by following rules for eloquence. And even outside the canon, which to our 
great advantage is fixed in a place of secure authority, there is no want of 
ecclesiastical writings, in reading which a man of ability will acquire a 
tinge of the eloquence with which they are written, even though he does not 
aim at this, but is solely intent on the matters treated of; especially, of 
course, if in addition he practice himself in writing, or dictating, and at 
last also in speaking, the opinions he has formed on grounds of piety and 
faith. If, however, such ability be wanting, the rules of rhetoric are either 
not understood, or if, after great labour has been spent in enforcing them, 
they come to be in some small measure understood, they prove of no service. 
For even those who have learnt them, and who speak with fluency and elegance, 
cannot always think of them when they are speaking so as to speak in 
accordance with them, unless they are discussing the rules themselves. Indeed, 
I think there are scarcely any who can do both things that is, speak well, 
and, in order to do this, think of the rules of speaking while they are 
speaking. For we must be careful that what we have got to say does not escape 
us whilst we are thinking about saying it according to the rules of art. 
Nevertheless, in the speeches of eloquent men, we find rules of eloquence 
carried out which the speakers did not think of as aids to eloquence at the 
time when they were speaking, whether they had ever learnt them, or whether 
they had never even met with them. For it is because they are eloquent that 
they exemplify these rules; it is not that they use them in order to be 
eloquent.</p>

<p class="par" id="iv.v.iv-p2">5. And, therefore, as infants cannot learn to speak except by learning words 
and phrases from those who do speak, why should not men become eloquent 
without being taught any art of speech, simply by reading and learning the 
speeches of eloquent men, and by imitating them as far as they can? And what 
do we find from the examples themselves to be the case in this respect? We 
know numbers who, without acquaintance with rhetorical rules, are more 
eloquent than many who have learnt these; but we know no one who is eloquent 
without having read and listened to the speeches and debates of eloquent men. 
For even the art of grammar, which teaches correctness of speech, need not be 
learnt by boys, if they have the advantage of growing up and living among men 
who speak correctly. For without knowing the names of any of the faults, they 
will, from being accustomed to correct speech, lay hold upon whatever is 
faulty in the speech of any one they listen to, and avoid it; just as city-bred 
men, even when illiterate, seize upon the faults of rustics.</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 4. The duty of the Christian teacher" prev="iv.v.iv" next="vi_3" id="v_3">

<h3 id="v_3-p0.1">Chapter 4</h3>
<p class="par" id="v_3-p1">6. It is the duty, then, of the interpreter and teacher of Holy Scripture, 
the defender of the true faith and the opponent of error, both to teach what 
is right and to refute what is wrong, and in the performance of this task to 
conciliate the hostile, to rouse the careless, and to tell the ignorant both 
what is occurring at present and what is probable in the future. But once that 
his hearers are friendly, attentive, and ready to learn, whether he has found 
them so, or has himself made them so, the remaining objects are to be carried 
out in whatever way the case requires. If the hearers need teaching, the 
matter treated of must be made fully known by means of narrative. On the other 
hand, to clear up points that are doubtful requires reasoning and the 
exhibition of proofs. If, however, the hearers require to be roused rather 
than instructed, in order that they may be diligent to do what they already 
know, and to bring their feelings into harmony with the truths they admit, 
greater vigour of speech is needed. Here entreaties and reproaches, 
exhortations and upbraidings, and all the other means of rousing the emotions, 
are necessary.</p>

<p class="par" id="v_3-p2">7. And all the methods I have mentioned are constantly used by nearly every 
one in cases where speech is the agency employed.</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 5. Wisdom of more importance than eloquence to the Christian teacher" prev="v_3" next="vii_3" id="vi_3">
<h3 id="vi_3-p0.1">Chapter 5</h3>
<p class="Body" id="vi_3-p1">But as some men employ these coarsely, inelegantly, and frigidly while 
others use them with acuteness, elegance, and spirit, the work that I am 
speaking of ought to be undertaken by one who can argue and speak with wisdom, 
if not with eloquence, and with profit to his hearers, even though he profit 
them less than he would if he could speak with eloquence too. But we must 
beware of the man who abounds in eloquent nonsense, and so much the more if 
the hearer is pleased with what is not worth listening to, and thinks that 
because the speaker is eloquent what he says must be true. And this opinion is 
held even by those who think that the art of rhetoric should be taught: for 
they confess that "though wisdom without eloquence is of little service to 
states, yet eloquence without wisdom is frequently a positive injury, and is 
of service never." If, then, the men who teach the principles of eloquence 
have been forced by truth to confess this in the very books which treat of 
eloquence, though they were ignorant of the true, that is, the heavenly wisdom 
which comes down from the Father of Lights, how much more ought we to feel it 
who are the sons and the ministers of this higher wisdom! Now a man speaks 
with more or less wisdom just as he has made more or less progress in the 
knowledge of Scripture; I do not mean by reading them much and committing them 
to memory, but by understanding them aright and carefully searching into their 
meaning. For there are who read and yet neglect them; they read to remember 
the words, but are careless about knowing the meaning. It is plain we must set 
far above these the men who are not so retentive of the words, but see with 
the eyes of the heart into the heart of Scripture. Better than either of 
these, however, is the man who, when he wishes, can repeat the words, and at 
the same time correctly apprehends their meaning.</p>

<p class="par" id="vi_3-p2">8. Now it is especially necessary for the man who is bound to speak wisely, 
even though he cannot speak eloquently, to retain in memory the words of 
Scripture. For the more he discerns the poverty of his own speech, the more he 
ought to draw on the riches of Scripture, so that what he says in his own 
words he may prove by the words of Scripture; and he himself, though small and 
weak in his own words, may gain strength and power from the confirming 
testimony of great men. For his proof gives pleasure when he cannot please by 
his mode of speech. But if a man desire to speak not only with wisdom, but 
with eloquence also (and assuredly he will prove of greater service if he can 
do both), I would rather send him to read, and listen to, and exercise himself 
in imitating, eloquent men, than advise him to spend time with the teachers of 
rhetoric; especially if the men he reads and listens to are justly praised as 
having spoken, or as being accustomed to speak, not only with eloquence, but 
with wisdom also. For eloquent speakers are heard with pleasure; wise speakers 
with profit. And, therefore, Scripture does not say that the multitude of the 
eloquent, but "the multitude of the wise is the welfare of the world." And as 
we must often swallow wholesome bitters, so we must always avoid unwholesome 
sweets. But what is better than wholesome sweetness or sweet wholesomeness? 
For the sweeter we try to make such things, the easier it is to make their 
wholesomeness serviceable. And so there are writers of the Church who have 
expounded the Holy Scriptures, not only with wisdom, but with eloquence as 
well; and there is not more time for the reading of these than is sufficient 
for those who are studious and at leisure to exhaust them.</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 6. The sacred writers unite eloquence with  wisdom" prev="vi_3" next="viii_3" id="vii_3">

<h3 id="vii_3-p0.1">Chapter 6</h3>
<p class="par" id="vii_3-p1">9. Here, perhaps, some one inquires whether the authors whose 
divinely-inspired writings constitute the canon, which carries with it a most 
wholesome authority, are to be considered wise only, or eloquent as well. A 
question which to me, and to those who think with me, is very easily settled. 
For where I understand these writers, it seems to me not only that nothing can 
be wiser, but also that nothing can be more eloquent. And I venture to affirm 
that all who truly understand what these writers say, perceive at the same 
time that it could not have been properly said in any other way. For as there 
is a kind of eloquence that is more becoming in youth, and a kind that is more 
becoming in old age, and nothing can be called eloquence if it be not suitable 
to the person of the speaker, so there is a kind of eloquence that is becoming 
in men who justly claim the highest authority, and who are evidently inspired 
of God. With this eloquence they spoke; no other would have been suitable for 
them; and this itself would be unsuitable in any other, for it is in keeping 
with their character, while it mounts as far above that of others (not from 
empty inflation, but from solid merit) as it seems to fall below them. Where, 
however, I do not understand these writers, though their eloquence is then 
less apparent, I have no doubt but that it is of the same kind as that I do 
understand. The very obscurity, too, of these divine and wholesome words was a 
necessary element in eloquence of a kind that was designed to profit our 
understandings, not only by the discovery of truth. but also by the exercise 
of their powers.</p>

<p class="par" id="vii_3-p2">10. I could, however, if I had time, show those men who cry up their own form 
of language as superior to that of our authors (not because of its majesty, 
but because of its inflation), that all those powers and beauties of eloquence 
which they make their boast, are to be found in the sacred writings which God 
in His goodness has provided to mould our characters, and to guide us from 
this world of wickedness to the blessed world above. But it is not the 
qualities which these writers have in common with the heathen orators and 
poets that give me such unspeakable delight in their eloquence; I am more 
struck with admiration at the way in which, by an eloquence peculiarly their 
own, they so use this eloquence of ours that it is not conspicuous either by 
its presence or its absence: for it did not become them either to condemn it 
or to make an ostentatious display of it; and if they had shunned it, they 
would have done the former; if they had made it prominent, they might have 
appeared to be doing the latter. And in those passages where the learned do 
note its presence, the matters spoken of are such, that the words in which 
they are put seem not so much to be sought out by the speaker as spontaneously 
to suggest themselves; as if wisdom were walking out of its house,—that is, 
the breast of the wise man, and eloquence, like an inseparable attendant, 
followed it without being called for.</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 7. Examples of true eloquence drawn from the epistles of Paul and the prophecies of Amos" prev="vii_3" next="ix_3" id="viii_3">

<h3 id="viii_3-p0.1">Chapter 7</h3>
<p class="par" id="viii_3-p1">11. For who would not see what the apostle meant to say, and how wisely he has 
said it, in the following passage: "We glory in tribulations also: knowing 
that tribulation worketh patience; and patience, experience; and experience, 
hope: and hope maketh not ashamed; because the love of God is shed abroad in 
our hearts by the Holy Ghost which is given unto us"? Now were any man 
unlearnedly learned (if I may use the expression) to contend that the apostle 
had here followed the rules of rhetoric, would not every Christian, learned or 
unlearned, laugh at him? And yet here we find the figure which is called in 
Greek "klimax" (climax,) and by some in Latin <span lang="LA" id="viii_3-p1.1">gradatio</span>, for they do not care 
to call it <span lang="LA" id="viii_3-p1.2">scala</span> (a ladder), when the words and ideas have a connection of 
dependency the one upon the other, as we see here that patience arises out of 
tribulation, experience out of patience, and hope out of experience. Another 
ornament, too, is found here; for after certain statements finished in a 
single tone of voice, which we call clauses and sections (<span lang="LA" id="viii_3-p1.3">membra et caesa</span>), 
but the Greeks "koola" and "kommata", there follows a rounded sentence 
(<span lang="LA" id="viii_3-p1.4">ambitus sive circuitus</span> ) which the Greeks call "periodos", the clauses of 
which are suspended on the voice of the speaker till the whole is completed by 
the last clause. For of the statements which precede the period; this is the 
first clause, "knowing that tribulation worketh patience;" the second, "and 
patience, experience;" the third, "and experience, hope." Then the period 
which is subjoined is completed in three clauses, of which the first is, "and 
hope maketh not ashamed;" the second, "because the love of God is shed abroad 
in our hearts;" the third, "by the Holy Ghost which is given unto us." But 
these and other matters of the same kind are taught in the art of elocution. 
As then I do not affirm that the apostle was guided by the rules of eloquence, 
so I do not deny that his wisdom naturally produced, and was accompanied by, 
eloquence.</p>

<p class="par" id="viii_3-p2">12. In the Second Epistle to the Corinthians, again, he refutes certain false 
apostles who had gone out from the Jews, and had been trying to injure his 
character; and being compelled to speak of himself though he ascribes this as 
folly to himself how wisely and how eloquently he speaks! But wisdom is his 
guide, eloquence his attendant; he follows the first, the second follows him, 
and yet he does not spurn it when it comes after him. "I say again," he says, 
"Let no man think me a fool: if otherwise, yet as a fool receive me, that I 
may boast myself a little. That which I speak, I speak it not after the Lord, 
but as it were foolishly, in this confidence of boasting. Seeing that many 
glory after the flesh, I will glory also. For ye suffer fools gladly, seeing 
ye yourselves are wise. For ye suffer, if a man bring you into bondage, if a 
man devour you, if a man take of you, if a man exalt himself, if a man smite 
you on the face. I speak as concerning reproach, as though we had been weak. 
Howbeit, whereinsoever any is bold (I speak foolishly), I am bold also. Are 
they Hebrews? so am I. Are they Israelites? so am I. Are they the seed of 
Abraham? so am I. Are they ministers of Christ? (I speak as a fool), I am 
more: in labours more abundant, in stripes above measure, in prisons more 
frequent, in deaths oft. Of the Jews five times received I forty stripes save 
one, thrice was I beaten with rods, once was I stoned, thrice I suffered 
shipwreck, a night and a day I have been in the deep; in journeying often, in 
perils of waters, in perils of robbers, in perils by mine own countrymen, in 
perils by the heathen, in perils in the city, in perils in the wilderness, in 
perils in the sea, in perils among false brethren; in weariness and 
painfulness, in watchings often, in hunger and thirst, in fastings often, in 
cold and nakedness. Besides those things which are without, that which comets 
upon me daily, the care of all the churches. Who is weak, and I am not weak? 
who is offended, and I burn not? If I must needs glory, I will glory of the 
things which concern my infirmities." The thoughtful and attentive perceive 
how much wisdom there is in these words. And even a man sound asleep must 
notice what a stream of eloquence flows through them.</p>

<p class="par" id="viii_3-p3">13. Further still, the educated man observes that those sections which the 
Greeks call "kommata", and the clauses and periods of which I spoke a short 
time ago, being intermingled in the most beautiful variety, make up the whole 
form and features (so to speak) of that diction by which even the unlearned 
are delighted and affected. For, from the place where I commenced to quote, 
the passage consists of periods: the first the smallest possible, consisting 
of two members; for a period cannot have less than two members, though it may 
have more: "I say again, let no man think me a fool." The next has three 
members: "if otherwise, yet as a fool receive me, that I may boast myself a 
little." The third has four members: "That which I speak, I speak it not after 
the Lord, but as it were foolishly, in this confidence of boasting." The 
fourth has two: "Seeing that many glory after the flesh, I will glory also." 
And the fifth has two: "For ye suffer fools gladly, seeing ye yourselves are 
wise." The sixth again has two members: "for ye suffer, if a man bring you 
into bondage." Then follow three sections (caesa): "if a man devour you, if a 
man take of you, if a man exalt himself." Next three clauses (membra): if "a 
man smite you on the face. I speak as concerning reproach, as though we had 
been weak." Then is subjoined a period of three members: "Howbeit, 
whereinsoever any is bold (I speak foolishly), I am bold also." After this, 
certain separate sections being put in the interrogatory form, separate 
sections are also given as answers, three to three: "Are they Hebrews? so am 
I. Are they Israelites? so am I. Are they the seed of Abraham? so am I." But a 
fourth section being put likewise in the interrogatory form, the answer is 
given not in another section (<span lang="LA" id="viii_3-p3.1">caesum</span>) but in a clause (<span lang="LA" id="viii_3-p3.2">membrum</span>): "Are they the 
ministers of Christ? (I speak as a fool.) I am more." Then the next four 
sections are given continuously, the interrogatory form being most elegantly 
suppressed: "in labours more abundant, in stripes above measure, in prisons 
more frequent, in deaths oft." Next is interposed a short period; for, by a 
suspension of the voice, "of the Jews five times" is to be marked off as 
constituting one member, to which is joined the second, "received I forty 
stripes save one." Then he returns to sections, and three are set down: 
"Thrice was I beaten with rods, once was I stoned, thrice I suffered 
shipwreck." Next comes a clause: "a night and a day I have been in the deep." 
Next fourteen sections burst forth with a vehemence which is most appropriate: 
"In journeying often, in perils of waters, in perils of robbers, in perils by 
mine own countrymen, in perils by the heathen, in perils in the city, in 
perils in the wilderness, in perils in the sea, in perils among false 
brethren, in weariness and painfulness, in watchings often, in hunger and 
thirst, in fastings often, in cold and nakedness." After this comes in a 
period of three members: "Besides those things which are without, that which 
comets upon me daily, the care of all the churches." And to this he adds two 
clauses in a tone of inquiry: "Who is weak, and I am not weak? who is 
offended, and I burn not?" In fine, this whole passage, as if panting for 
breath, winds up with a period of two members: "If I must needs glory, I will 
glory of the things which concern mine infirmities." And I cannot sufficiently 
express how beautiful and delightful it is when after this outburst he rests 
himself, and gives the hearer rest, by interposing a slight narrative. For he 
goes on to say: "The God and Father of our Lord Jesus Christ, which is blessed 
for evermore, knoweth that I lie not." And then he tells, very briefly the 
danger he had been in, and the way he escaped it.</p>

<p class="par" id="viii_3-p4">14. It would be tedious to pursue the matter further, or to point out the same 
facts in regard to other passages of Holy Scripture. Suppose I had taken the 
further trouble, at least in regard to the passages I have quoted from the 
apostle's writings, to point out figures of speech which are taught in the art 
of rhetoric? Is it not more likely that serious men would think I had gone too 
far, than that any of the studious would think I had done enough? All these 
things when taught by masters are reckoned of great value; great prices are 
paid for them, and the vendors puff them magniloquently. And I fear lest I too 
should smack of that puffery while thus descanting on matters of this kind. It 
was necessary, however, to reply to the ill-taught men who think our authors 
contemptible; not because they do not possess, but because they do not 
display, the eloquence which these men value so highly.</p>

<p class="par" id="viii_3-p5">15. But perhaps some one is thinking that I have selected the Apostle Paul 
because he is our great orator. For when he says, "Though I be rude in speech, 
yet not in knowledge," he seems to speak as if granting so much to his 
detractors, not as confessing that he recognized its truth. If he had said, "I 
am indeed rude in speech, but not in knowledge," we could not in any way have 
put another meaning upon it. He did not hesitate plainly to assert his 
knowledge, because without it he could not have been the teacher of the 
Gentiles. And certainly if we bring forward anything of his as a model of 
eloquence, we take it from those epistles which even his very detractors, who 
thought his bodily presence weak and his speech contemptible, confessed to be 
weighty and powerful.</p>
<p class="Body" id="viii_3-p6">I see, then, that I must say something about the eloquence of the prophets 
also, where many things are concealed under a metaphorical style, which the 
more completely they seem buried under figures of speech, give the greater 
pleasure when brought to light. In this place, however, it is my duty to 
select a passage of such a kind that I shall not be compelled to explain the 
matter, but only to commend the style. And I shall do so, quoting principally 
from the book of that prophet who says that he was a shepherd or herdsman, and 
was called by God from that occupation, and sent to prophesy to the people of 
God. I shall not, however, follow the Septuagint translators, who, being 
themselves under the guidance of the Holy Spirit in their translation, seem to 
have altered some passages with the view of directing the reader's attention 
more particularly to the investigation of the spiritual sense; (and hence some 
passages are more obscure, because more figurative, in their translation;) but 
I shall follow the translation made from the Hebrew into Latin by the 
presbyter Jerome, a man thoroughly acquainted with both tongues.</p>

<p class="par" id="viii_3-p7">16. When, then, this rustic, or quondam rustic prophet, was denouncing the 
godless, the proud, the luxurious, and therefore the most neglectful of 
brotherly love, he called aloud, saying: "Woe to you who are at ease in Zion, 
and trust in the mountain of Samaria, who are heads and chiefs of the people, 
entering with pomp into the house of Israel! Pass ye unto Calneh, and see; and 
from thence go ye to Hamath the great; then go down to Gath of the 
Philistines, and to all the best kingdoms of these: is their border greater 
than your border? Ye that are set apart for the day of evil, and that come 
near to the seat of oppression; that lie upon beds of ivory, and stretch 
yourselves upon couches; that eat the lamb of the flock, and the calves out of 
the midst of the herd; that chant to the sound of the viol. They thought that 
they had instruments of music like David; drinking wine in bowls, and 
anointing themselves with the costliest ointment: and they were not grieved 
for the affliction of Joseph." Suppose those men who, assuming to be 
themselves learned and eloquent, despise our prophets as untaught and 
unskilful of speech, had been obliged to deliver a message like this, and to 
men such as these, would they have chosen to express themselves in any respect 
differently—those of them, at least, who would have shrunk from raving like 
madmen?</p>

<p class="par" id="viii_3-p8">17. For what is there that sober ears could wish changed in this speech? In 
the first place, the invective itself; with what vehemence it throws itself 
upon the drowsy senses to startle them into wakefulness: "Woe to you who are 
at ease in Zion, and trust in the mountains of Samaria, who are heads and 
chiefs of the people, entering with pomp into the house of Israel!" Next, that 
he may use the favours of God, who has bestowed upon them ample territory, to 
show their ingratitude in trusting to the mountain of Samaria, where idols 
were worshipped: "Pass ye unto Calneh," he says, "and see, and from thence go 
ye to Hamath the great; then go down to Gath of the Philistines, and to all 
the best kingdoms of these: is their border greater than your border?" At the 
same time also that these things are spoken of, the style is adorned with 
names of places as with lamps, such as "Zion," "Samaria," "Calneh," "Hamath 
the great," and "Gath of the Philistine." Then the words joined to these 
places are most appropriately varied: "ye are at ease," "ye trust," "pass on," 
"go," "descend."</p>

<p class="par" id="viii_3-p9">18. And then the future captivity under an oppressive king is announced as 
approaching, when it is added: "Ye that are set apart for the day of evil, and 
come near to the seat of oppression." Then are subjoined the evils of luxury: 
"ye that lie upon beds of ivory, and stretch yourselves upon couches; that eat 
the lamb from the flock, and the calves out of the midst of the herd." These 
six clauses form three periods of two members each. For he does not say: "Ye 
who are set apart for the day of evil, who come near to the seat of 
oppression, who sleep upon beds of ivory, who stretch yourselves upon couches, 
who eat the lamb from the flock, and calves out of the herd." If he had so 
expressed it, this would have had its beauty: six separate clauses running on, 
the same pronoun being repeated each time, and each clause finished by a 
single effort of the speaker's voice. But it is more beautiful as it is, the 
clauses being joined in pairs under the same pronoun, and forming three 
sentences, one referring to the prophecy of the captivity: "Ye that are set 
apart for the day of evil, and come near the seat of oppression;" the second 
to lasciviousness: "ye that lie upon beds of ivory, and stretch yourselves 
upon couches;" the third to gluttony: "who eat the lamb from the flock, and 
the calves out of the midst of the herd." So that it is at the discretion of 
the speaker whether he finish each clause separately and make six altogether, 
or whether he suspend his voice at the first, the third, and the fifth, and by 
joining the second to the first, the fourth to the third, and the sixth to the 
fifth, make three most elegant periods of two members each: one describing the 
imminent catastrophe; another, the lascivious couch; and the third, the 
luxurious table.</p>

<p class="par" id="viii_3-p10">19. Next he reproaches them with their luxury in seeking pleasure for the 
sense of hearing. And here, when he had said, "Ye who chant to the sound of 
the viol," seeing that wise men may practice music wisely, he, with wonderful 
skill of speech, checks the flow of his invective, and not now speaking to, 
but of, these men, and to show us that we must distinguish the music of the 
wise from the music of the voluptuary, he does not say, "Ye who chant to the 
sound of the viol, and think that ye have instruments of music like David;" 
but he first addresses to themselves what it is right the voluptuaries should 
hear, "Ye who chant to the sound of the viol;" and then, turning to others, he 
intimates that these men have not even skill in their art: "they thought that 
they had instruments of music like David; drinking wine in bowls, and 
anointing themselves with the costliest ointment." These three clauses are 
best pronounced when the voice is suspended on the first two members of the 
period, and comes to a pause on the third.</p>

<p class="par" id="viii_3-p11">20. But now as to the sentence which follows all these: "and they were not 
grieved for the affliction of Joseph." Whether this be pronounced continuously 
as one clause, or whether with more elegance we hold the words, "and they were 
not grieved," suspended on the voice, and then add, "for the affliction of 
Joseph," so as to make a period of two members; in any case, it is a touch of 
marvelous beauty not to say, "and they were not grieved for the affliction of 
their brother;" but to put Joseph for brother, so as to indicate brothers in 
general by the proper name of him who stands out illustrious from among his 
brethren, both in regard to the injuries he suffered and the good return he 
made. And, indeed, I do not know whether this figure of speech, by which 
Joseph is put for brothers in general, is one of those laid down in that art 
which I learnt and used to teach. But how beautiful it is, and how it comes 
home to the intelligent reader, it is useless to tell any one who does not 
himself feel it.</p>

<p class="par" id="viii_3-p12">21. And a number of other points bearing on the laws of eloquence could be 
found in this passage which I have chosen as an example. But an intelligent 
reader will not be so much instructed by carefully analysing it as kindled by 
reciting it with spirit. Nor was it composed by man's art and care, but it 
flowed forth in wisdom and eloquence from the divine mind; wisdom not aiming 
at eloquence, yet eloquence not shrinking from wisdom. For if, as certain very 
eloquent and acute men have perceived and said, the rules which are laid down 
in the art of oratory could not have been observed, and noted, and reduced to 
system, if they had not first had their birth in the genius of orators, is it 
wonderful that they should be found in the messengers of Him who is the author 
of all genius? Therefore let us acknowledge that the canonical writers are not 
only wise but eloquent also, with an eloquence suited to a character and 
position like theirs.</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 8. The obscurity of the sacred writers, though compatible with eloquence, not to be imitated by Christian teachers" prev="viii_3" next="x_3" id="ix_3">

<h3 id="ix_3-p0.1">Chapter 8</h3>
<p class="par" id="ix_3-p1">22. But although I take some examples of eloquence from those writings of 
theirs which there is no difficulty in understanding, we are not by any means 
to suppose that it is our duty to imitate them in those passages where, with a 
view to exercise and train the minds of their readers, and to break in upon 
the satiety and stimulate the zeal of those who are willing to learn, and with 
a view also to throw a veil over the minds of the godless either that they may 
be converted to piety or shut out from a knowledge of the mysteries, from one 
or other of these reasons they have expressed themselves with a useful and 
wholesome obscurity. They have indeed expressed themselves in such a way that 
those who in after ages understood and explained them aright have in the 
Church of God obtained an esteem, not indeed equal to that with which they are 
themselves regarded, but coming next to it. The expositors of these writers, 
then, ought not to express themselves in the same way, as if putting forward 
their expositions as of the same authority; but they ought in all their 
deliverances to make it their first and chief aim to be understood, using as 
far as possible such clearness of speech that either he will be very dull who 
does not understand them, or that if what they say should not be very easily 
or quickly understood, the reason will lie not in their manner of expression, 
but in the difficulty and subtilty of the matter they are trying to explain.</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 9. How, and with whom, difficult passages are to be discussed" prev="ix_3" next="xi_3" id="x_3">

<h3 id="x_3-p0.1">Chapter 9</h3>
<p class="par" id="x_3-p1">23. For there are some passages which are not understood in their proper 
force, or are understood with great difficulty, at whatever length, however 
clearly, or with whatever eloquence the speaker may expound them; and these 
should never be brought before the people at all, or only on rare occasions 
when there is some urgent reason. In books, however, which are written in such 
a style that, if understood, they, so to speak, draw their own readers, and if 
not understood, give no trouble to those who do not care to read them, and in 
private conversations, we must not shrink from the duty of bringing the truth 
which we ourselves have reached within the comprehension of others, however 
difficult it may be to understand it, and whatever labour in the way of 
argument it may cost us. Only two conditions are to be insisted upon, that our 
hearer or companion should have an earnest desire to learn the truth, and 
should have capacity of mind to receive it in whatever form it may be 
communicated, the teacher not being so anxious about the eloquence as about 
the clearness of his teaching.</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 10. The necessity for perspicuity of style" prev="x_3" next="xii_3" id="xi_3">

<h3 id="xi_3-p0.1">Chapter 10</h3>
<p class="par" id="xi_3-p1">24. Now a strong desire for clearness sometimes leads to neglect of the more 
polished forms of speech, and indifference about what sounds well, compared 
with what dearly expresses and conveys the meaning intended. Whence a certain 
author, when dealing with speech of this kind, says that there is in it "a 
kind of careful negligence." Yet while taking away ornament, it does not bring 
in vulgarity of speech; though good teachers have, or ought to have, so great 
an anxiety about teaching that they will employ a word which cannot be made 
pure Latin without becoming obscure or ambiguous, but which when used 
according to the vulgar idiom is neither ambiguous nor obscure) not in the way 
the learned, but rather in the way the unlearned employ it. For if our 
translators did not shrink from saying, "<span lang="LA" id="xi_3-p1.1">Non congregabo conventicula eorum de 
sanguinibus</span>" (I shall not assemble their assemblies of blood), because they 
felt that it was important for the sense to put a word here in the plural 
which in Latin is only used in the singular; why should a teacher of godliness 
who is addressing an unlearned audience shrink from using "<span lang="LA" id="xi_3-p1.2">ossum"</span>; instead of 
"os", if he fear that the latter might be taken not as the singular of "<span lang="LA" id="xi_3-p1.3">ossa</span>", 
but as the singular of "<span lang="LA" id="xi_3-p1.4">ora</span>", seeing that African ears have no quick 
perception of the shortness or length of vowels? And what advantage is there 
in purity of speech which does not lead to understanding in the hearer, seeing 
that there is no use at all in speaking, if they do not understand us for 
whose sake we speak? He, therefore, who teaches will avoid all words that do 
not teach; and if instead of them he can find words which are at once pure and 
intelligible, he will take these by preference; if, however, he cannot, either 
because there are no such words, or because they do not at the time occur to 
him, he will use words that are not quite pure, if only the substance of his 
thought be conveyed and apprehended in its integrity.</p>

<p class="par" id="xi_3-p2">25. And this must be insisted on as necessary to our being understood, not 
only in conversations, whether with one person or with several, but much more 
in the case of a speech delivered in public: for in conversation any one has 
the power of asking a question; but when all are silent that one may be heard, 
and all faces are turned attentively upon him, it is neither customary nor 
decorous for a person to ask a question about what he does not understand; and 
on this account the speaker ought to be especially careful to give assistance 
to those who cannot ask it. Now a crowd anxious for instruction generally 
shows by its movements if it understands what is said; and until some 
indication of this sort be given, the subject discussed ought to be turned 
over and over, and put in every shape and form and variety of expression, a 
thing which cannot be done by men who are repeating words prepared beforehand 
and committed to memory. As soon, however, as the speaker has ascertained that 
what he says is understood, he ought either to bring his address to a close, 
or pass on to another point. For if a man gives pleasure when he throws light 
upon points on which people wish for instruction, he becomes wearisome when he 
dwells at length upon things that are already well known, especially when 
men's expectation was fixed on having the difficulties of the passage removed. 
For even things that are very well known are told for the sake of the pleasure 
they give, if the attention be directed not to the things themselves, but to 
the way in which they are told. Nay, even when the style itself is already 
well known, if it be pleasing to the hearers, it is almost a matter of 
indifference whether he who speaks be a speaker or a reader. For things that 
are gracefully written are often not only read with delight by those who are 
making their first acquaintance with them, but reread with delight by those 
who have already made acquaintance with them, and have not yet forgotten them; 
nay, both these classes will derive pleasure even from hearing another man 
repeat them. And if a man has forgotten anything, when he is reminded of it he 
is taught. But I am not now treating of the mode of giving pleasure. I am 
speaking of the mode in which men who desire to learn ought to be taught. And 
the best mode is that which secures that he who hears shall hear the truth, 
and that what he hears he shall understand. And when this point has been 
reached, no further labour need be spent on the truth itself, as if it 
required further explanation; but perhaps some trouble may be taken to enforce 
it so as to bring it home to the heart. If it appear right to do this, it 
ought to be done so moderately as not to lead to weariness and impatience.</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 11. The Christian teacher must speak clearly, but not inelegantly" prev="xi_3" next="xiii_3" id="xii_3">

<h3 id="xii_3-p0.1">Chapter 11</h3>
<p class="par" id="xii_3-p1">26. For teaching, of course, true eloquence consists, not in making people 
like what they disliked, nor in making them do what they shrank from, but in 
making clear what was obscure; yet if this be done without grace of style, the 
benefit does not extend beyond the few eager students who are anxious to know 
whatever is to be learnt, however rude and unpolished the form in which it is 
put, and who, when they have succeeded in their object, find the plain truth 
pleasant food enough. And it is one of the distinctive features of good 
intellects not to love words, but the truth in words. For of what service is a 
golden key, if it cannot open what we want it to open? Or what objection is 
there to a wooden one if it can, seeing that to open what is shut is all we 
want? But as there is a certain analogy between learning and eating, the very 
food without which it is impossible to live must be flavoured to meet the 
tastes of the majority.</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 12. The aim of the orator, according to Cicero, is to  teach, to delight, and to move. Of these, teaching is the most  essential" prev="xii_3" next="xiv_3" id="xiii_3">

<h3 id="xiii_3-p0.1">Chapter 12</h3>
<p class="par" id="xiii_3-p1">27. Accordingly a great orator has truly said that "an eloquent man must speak 
so as to teach, to delight, and to persuade." Then he adds: "To teach is a 
necessity, to delight is a beauty, to persuade is a triumph." Now of these 
three, the one first mentioned, the teaching, which is a matter of necessity, 
depends on what we say; the other two on the way we say it. He, then, who 
speaks with the purpose of teaching should not suppose that he has said what 
he has to say as long as he is not understood; for although what he has said 
be intelligible to himself, it is not said at all to the man who does not 
understand it. If, however, he is understood, he has said his say, whatever 
may have been his manner of saying it. But if he wishes to delight or persuade 
his hearer as well, he will not accomplish that end by putting his thought in 
any shape no matter what, but for that purpose the style of speaking is a 
matter of importance. And as the hearer must be pleased in order to secure his 
attention, so he must be persuaded in order to move him to action. And as he 
is pleased if you speak with sweetness and elegance, so he is persuaded if he 
be drawn by your promises, and awed by your threats; If he reject what you 
condemn, and embrace what you commend; if he grieve when you heap up objects 
for grief, and rejoice when you point out an object for joy; if he pity those 
whom you present to him as objects of pity, and shrink from those whom you set 
before him as men to be feared and shunned. I need not go over all the other 
things that can be done by powerful eloquence to move the minds of the 
hearers, not telling them what they ought to do, but urging them to do what 
they already know ought to be done.</p>

<p class="par" id="xiii_3-p2">28. If however, they do not yet know this, they must of course be instructed 
before they can be moved. And perhaps the mere knowledge of their duty will 
have such an effect that there will be no need to move them with greater 
strength of eloquence. Yet when this is needful, it ought to be done. And it 
is needful when people, knowing what they ought to do, do it not. Therefore, 
to teach is a necessity. For what men know, it is in their own hands either to 
do or not to do. But who would say that it is their duty to do what they do 
not know? On the same principle, to persuade is not a necessity: for it is not 
always called for; as, for example, when the hearer yields his assent to one 
who simply teaches or gives pleasure. For this reason also to persuade is a 
triumph, because it is possible that a man may be taught and delighted, and 
yet not give his consent. And what will be the use of gaining the first two 
ends if we fail in the third? Neither is it a necessity to give pleasure; for 
when, in the course of an address, the truth is clearly pointed out (and this 
is the true function of teaching), it is not the fact, nor is it the 
intention, that the style of speech should make the truth pleasing, or that 
the style should of itself give pleasure; but the truth itself, when exhibited 
in its naked simplicity, gives pleasure, because it is the truth. And hence 
even falsities are frequently a source of pleasure when they are brought to 
light and exposed. It is not, of course, their falsity that gives pleasure; 
but as it is true that they are false, the speech which shows this to be true 
gives pleasure.</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 13. The hearer must be moved as well as instructed" prev="xiii_3" next="xv_3" id="xiv_3">

<h3 id="xiv_3-p0.1">Chapter 13</h3>
<p class="par" id="xiv_3-p1">29. But for the sake at those who are so fastidious that they do not care for 
truth unless it is put in the form of a pleasing discourse, no small place has 
been assigned in eloquence to the art of pleasing. And yet even this is not 
enough for those stubborn minded men who both understand and are pleased with 
the teacher's discourse, without deriving any profit from it. For what does it 
profit a man that he both confesses the truth and praises the eloquence, if he 
does not yield his consent, when it is only for the sake of securing his 
consent that the speaker in urging the truth gives careful attention to what 
he says? If the truths taught are such that to believe or to know them is 
enough, to give one's assent implies nothing more than to confess that they 
are true. When, however, the truth taught is one that must be carried into 
practice, and that is taught for the very purpose of being practiced, it is 
useless to be persuaded of the truth of what is said, it is useless to be 
pleased with the manner in which it is said, if it be not so learnt as to be 
practiced. The eloquent divine, then, when he is urging a practical truth, 
must not only teach so as to give instruction, and please so as to keep up the 
attention, but he must also sway the mind so as to subdue the will. For if a 
man be not moved by the force of truth, though it is demonstrated to his own 
confession, and clothed in beauty of style, nothing remains but to subdue him 
by the power of eloquence.</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 14. Beauty of diction to be in keeping with the matter" prev="xiv_3" next="xvi_3" id="xv_3">

<h3 id="xv_3-p0.1">Chapter 14</h3>
<p class="par" id="xv_3-p1">30. And so much labour has been spent by men on the beauty of expression here 
spoken of, that not only is it not our duty to do, but it is our duty to shun 
and abhor, many and heinous deeds of wickedness and baseness which wicked and 
base men have with great eloquence recommended, not with a view to gaining 
assent, but merely for the sake of being read with pleasure. But may God avert 
from His Church what the prophet Jeremiah says of the synagogue of the Jews: 
"A wonderful and horrible thing is committed in the land: the prophets 
prophesy falsely, and the priests applaud them with their hands; and my people 
love to have it so: and what will ye do in the end thereof?" O eloquence, 
which is the more terrible from its purity, and the more crushing from its 
solidity! Assuredly it is "a hammer that breaketh the rock in pieces." For to 
this God Himself has by the same prophet compared His own word spoken through 
His holy prophets. God forbid, then, God forbid that with us the priest should 
applaud the false prophet, and that God's people should love to have it so. 
God forbid, I say, that with us there should be such terrible madness! For 
what shall we do in the end thereof? And assuredly it is preferable, even 
though what is said should be less intelligible, less pleasing, and less 
persuasive, that truth be spoken, and that what is just, not what is 
iniquitous, be listened to with pleasure. But this, of course, cannot be, 
unless what is true and just be expressed with elegance.</p>

<p class="par" id="xv_3-p2">31. In a serious assembly, moreover, such as is spoken of when it is said, "I 
will praise Thee among much people," no pleasure is derived from that species 
of eloquence which indeed says nothing that is false, but which buries small 
and unimportant truths under a frothy mass of ornamental words, such as would 
not be graceful or dignified even if used to adorn great and fundamental 
truths. And something of this sort occurs in a letter of the blessed Cyprian, 
which, I think, came there by accident, or else was inserted designedly with 
this view, that posterity might see how the wholesome discipline of Christian 
teaching had cured him of that redundancy of language, and confined him to a 
more dignified and modest form of eloquence, such as we find in his subsequent 
letters, a style which is admired without effort, is sought after with 
eagerness, but is not attained without great difficulty. He says, then, in one 
place, "Let us seek this abode: the neighbouring solitudes afford a retreat 
where, whilst the spreading shoots of the vine trees, pendulous and 
intertwined, creep amongst the supporting reeds, the leafy covering has made a 
portico of vine." There is wonderful fluency and exuberance of language here; 
but it is too florid to be pleasing to serious minds. But people who are fond 
of this style are apt to think that men who do not use it, but employ a more 
chastened style, do so because they cannot attain the former, not because 
their judgment teaches them to avoid it. Wherefore this holy man shows both 
that he can speak in that style. for he has done so once, and that he does not 
choose, for he never uses it again.</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 15. The Christian teacher should pray before preaching" prev="xv_3" next="xvii_3" id="xvi_3">

<h3 id="xvi_3-p0.1">Chapter 15</h3>
<p class="par" id="xvi_3-p1">32. And so our Christian orator, while he says what is just, and holy, and 
good (and he ought never to say anything else), does all he can to be heard 
with intelligence, with pleasure, and with obedience; and he need not doubt 
that if he succeed in this object, and so far as he succeeds, he will succeed 
more by piety in prayer than by gifts of oratory; and so he ought to pray for 
himself, and for those he is about to address, before he attempts to speak. 
And when the hour is come that he must speak, he ought, before he opens his 
mouth, to lift up his thirsty soul to God, to drink in what he is about to 
pour forth, and to be himself filled with what he is about to distribute. For, 
as in regard to every matter of faith and love there are many things that may 
be said, and many ways of saying them, who knows what it is expedient at a 
given moment for us to say, or to be heard saying, except God who knows the 
hearts of all? And who can make us say what we ought, and in the way we ought, 
except Him in whose hand both we and our speeches are? Accordingly, he who is 
anxious both to know and to teach should learn all that is to be taught, and 
acquire such a faculty of speech as is suitable for a divine. But when the 
hour for speech arrives, let him reflect upon that saying of our Lord's, as 
better suited to the wants of a pious mind: "Take no thought how or what ye 
shall speak; for it shall be given you in that same hour what ye shall speak. 
For it is not ye that speak, but the Spirit of your Father which speaketh in 
you." The Holy Spirit, then, speaks thus in those who for Christ's sake are 
delivered to the persecutors; why not also in those who deliver Christ's 
message to those who are willing to learn?</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 16. Human directions not to be despised though God makes the true teacher" prev="xvi_3" next="xviii_3" id="xvii_3">

<h3 id="xvii_3-p0.1">Chapter 16</h3>
<p class="par" id="xvii_3-p1">33. Now if any one says that we need not direct men how or what they should 
teach, since the Holy Spirit makes them teachers, he may as well say that we 
need not pray, since our Lord says, "Your Father knoweth what things ye have 
need of before ye ask Him;" or that the Apostle Paul should not have given 
directions to Timothy and Titus as to how or what they should teach others. 
And these three apostolic epistles ought to be constantly before the eyes of 
every one who has obtained the position of a teacher in the Church. In the 
First Epistle to Timothy do we not read: "These things command and teach?" 
What these things are, has been told previously. Do we not read there: "Rebuke 
not an elder, but entreat him as a father?" Is it not said in the Second 
Epistle: "Hold fast the form of sound words,; which thou hast heard of me?" 
And is he not there told: "Study to show thyself approved unto God, a workman 
that needeth not to be ashamed, rightly dividing the word of truth?" And in 
the same place: "Preach the word; be instant in season, out of season; 
reprove, rebuke, exhort, with all longsuffering and doctrine." And so in the 
Epistle to Titus, does he not say that a bishop ought to "hold fast the 
faithful word as he has been taught, that he may be able by sound doctrine 
both to exhort and to convince the gainsayers?" There, too, he says: "But 
speak thou the things which become sound doctrine: that the aged men be 
sober," and so on. And there, too: "These things speak, and exhort, and rebuke 
with all authority. Let no man despise thee. Put them in mind to be subject to 
principalities and powers," and so on. What then are we to think? Does the 
apostle in any way contradict himself, when, though he says that men are made 
teachers by the operation of the Holy Spirit, he yet himself gives them 
directions how and what they should teach? Or are we to understand, that 
though the duty of men to teach even the teachers does not cease when the Holy 
Spirit is given, yet that neither is he who planteth anything, nor he who 
watereth, but God who giveth the increase? Wherefore though holy men be our 
helpers, or even holy angels assist us, no one learns aright the things that 
pertain to life with God, until God makes him ready to learn from Himself, 
that God who is thus addressed in the psalm: "Teach me to do Thy will; for 
Thou art my God." And so the same apostle says to Timothy himself, speaking, 
of course, as teacher to disciple: "But continue thou in the things which thou 
hast learned and hast been assured of, knowing of whom thou hast learned 
them." For as the medicines which men apply to the bodies of their fellow-men 
are of no avail except God gives them virtue (who can heal without their aid, 
though they cannot without His), and yet they are applied; and if it be done 
from a sense of duty, it is esteemed a work of mercy or benevolence; so the 
aids of teaching, applied through the instrumentality of man, are of advantage 
to the soul only when God works to make them of advantage, who could give the 
gospel to man even without the help or agency of men.</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 17. Threefold division of the various styles of speech" prev="xvii_3" next="xix_3" id="xviii_3">

<h3 id="xviii_3-p0.1">Chapter 17</h3>
<p class="par" id="xviii_3-p1">34. He then who, in speaking, aims at enforcing what is good, should not 
despise any of those three objects, either to teach, or to give pleasure, or 
to move, and should pray and strive, as we have said above, to be heard with 
intelligence, with pleasure, and with ready compliance. And when he does this 
with elegance and propriety, he may justly be called eloquent, even though he 
do not carry with him the assent of his hearer. For it is these three ends, 
viz., teaching, giving pleasure, and moving, that the great master of Roman 
eloquence himself seems to have intended that the following three directions 
should subserve: "He, then, shall be eloquent, who can say little things in a 
subdued style, moderate things in a temperate style, and great things in a 
majestic style:" as if he had taken in also the three ends mentioned above, 
and had embraced the whole in one sentence thus: "He, then, shall be eloquent, 
who can say little things in a subdued style, in order to give instruction, 
moderate things in a temperate style, in order to give pleasure, and great 
things in a majestic style, in order to sway the mind."</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 18. The Christian orator is constantly dealing with great matters" prev="xviii_3" next="xx_3" id="xix_3">

<h3 id="xix_3-p0.1">Chapter 18</h3>
<p class="par" id="xix_3-p1">35. Now the author I have quoted could have exemplified these three 
directions, as laid down by himself, in regard to legal questions: he could 
not, however, have done so in regard to ecclesiastical questions,—the only 
ones that an address such as I wish to give shape to is concerned with. For of 
legal questions those are called small which have reference to pecuniary 
transactions; those great where a matter relating to man's life or liberty 
comes up. Cases, again, which have to do with neither of these, and where the 
intention is not to get the hearer to do, or to pronounce judgment upon 
anything, but only to give him pleasure, occupy as it were a middle place 
between the former two, and are on that account called middling, or moderate. 
For moderate things get their name from modus (a measure); and it is an abuse, 
not a proper use of the word moderate, to put it for little. In questions like 
ours, however, where all things, and especially those addressed to the people 
from the place of authority, ought to have reference to men's salvation, and 
that not their temporal but their eternal salvation, and where also the thing 
to be guarded against is eternal ruin, everything that we say is important; so 
much so, that even what the preacher says about pecuniary matters, whether it 
have reference to loss or gain, whether the amount be great or small, should 
not seem unimportant. For justice is never unimportant, and justice ought 
assuredly to be observed, even in small affairs of money, as our Lord says: 
"He that is faithful in that which is least, is faithful also in much." That 
which is least, then, is very little; but to be faithful in that which is 
least is great. For as the nature of the circle, viz., that all lines drawn 
from the centre to the circumference are equal, is the same in a great disk 
that it is in the smallest coin; so the greatness of justice is in no degree 
lessened, though the matters to which justice is applied be small.</p>

<p class="par" id="xix_3-p2">36. And when the apostle spoke about trials in regard to secular affairs (and 
what were these but matters of money?), he says: "Dare any of you, having a 
matter against another, go to law before the unjust, and not before the 
saints? Do ye not know that the saints shall judge the world? And if the world 
shall be judged by you, are ye unworthy to judge the smallest matters? Know ye 
not that we shall judge angels? How much more things that pertain to this 
life? If, then, ye have judgments of things pertaining to this life, set them 
to judge who are least esteemed in the Church. I speak to your shame. Is it 
so, that there is not a wise man among you? No, not one that shall be able to 
judge between his brethren? But brother goes to law with brother, and that 
before the unbelievers. Now therefore there is utterly a fault among you, 
because ye go to law one with another: why do ye not rather take wrong? Why do 
ye not rather suffer yourselves to be defrauded? Nay, ye do wrong, and 
defraud, and that your brethren. Know ye not that the unrighteous shall not 
inherit the kingdom of God?" Why is it that the apostle is so indignant, and 
that he thus accuses, and upbraids, and chides, and threatens? Why is it that 
the changes in his tone, so frequent and so abrupt, testify to the depth of 
his emotion? Why is it, in fine, that he speaks in a tone so exalted about 
matters so very trifling? Did secular matters deserve so much at his hands? 
God forbid. No; but all this is done for the sake of justice, charity, and 
piety, which in the judgment of every sober mind are great, even when applied 
to matters the very least.</p>

<p class="par" id="xix_3-p3">37. Of course, if we were giving men advice as to how they ought to conduct 
secular cases, either for themselves or for their connections, before the 
church courts, we would rightly advise them to conduct them quietly as matters 
of little moment. But we are treating of the manner of speech of the man who 
is to be a teacher of the truths which deliver us from eternal misery and 
bring us to eternal happiness; and wherever these truths are spoken of, 
whether in public or private, whether to one or many, whether to friends or 
enemies, whether in a continuous discourse or in conversation, whether in 
tracts, or in books, or in letters long or short, they are of great 
importance. Unless indeed we are prepared to say that, because a cup of cold 
water is a very trifling and common thing, the saying of our Lord that he who 
gives a cup of cold water to one of His disciples shall in no wise lose his 
reward, is very trivial and unimportant. Or that when a preacher takes this 
saying as his text, he should think his subject very unimportant, and 
therefore speak without either eloquence or power, but in a subdued and humble 
style. Is it not the case that when we happen to speak on this subject to the 
people, and the presence of God is with us, so that what we say is not 
altogether unworthy of the subject, a tongue of fire springs up out of that 
cold water which inflames even the cold hearts of men with a zeal for doing 
works of mercy in hope of an eternal reward?</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 19. The Christian teacher must use different styles on different occasions" prev="xix_3" next="xxi_3" id="xx_3">

<h3 id="xx_3-p0.1">Chapter 19</h3>
<p class="par" id="xx_3-p1">38. And yet, while our teacher ought to speak of great matters, he ought not 
always to be speaking of them in a majestic tone, but in a subdued tone when 
he is teaching, temperately when he is giving praise or blame. When, however, 
something is to be done, and we are speaking to those who ought, but are not 
willing, to do it, then great matters must be spoken of with power, and in a 
manner calculated to sway the mind. And sometimes the same important matter is 
treated in all these ways at different times, quietly when it is being taught, 
temperately when its importance is being urged, and powerfully when we are 
forcing a mind that is averse to the truth to turn and embrace it. For is 
there anything greater than God Himself? Is nothing, then, to be learnt about 
Him? Or ought he who is teaching the Trinity in unity to speak of it otherwise 
than in the method of calm discussion, so that in regard to a subject which it 
is not easy to comprehend, we may understand as much as it is given us to 
understand? Are we in this case to seek out ornaments instead of proofs? Or is 
the hearer to be moved to do something instead of being instructed so that he 
may learn something? But when we come to praise God, either in Himself, or in 
His works, what a field for beauty and splendour of language opens up before 
man, who can task his powers to the utmost in praising Him whom no one can 
adequately praise, though there is no one who does not praise Him in some 
measure! But if He be not worshipped, or if idols, whether they be demons or 
any created being whatever, be worshipped with Him or in preference to Him, 
then we ought to speak out with power and impressiveness, show how great a 
wickedness this is, and urge men to flee from it.</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 20. Examples of the various styles drawn from Scripture" prev="xx_3" next="xxii_3" id="xxi_3">

<h3 id="xxi_3-p0.1">Chapter 20</h3>
<p class="par" id="xxi_3-p1">39. But now to come to something more definite. We have an example of the 
calm, subdued style in the Apostle Paul, where he says: "Tell me, ye that 
desire to be under the law, do ye not hear the law? For it is written, that 
Abraham had two sons; the one by a bond maid, the other by a free woman. But 
he who was of the bond woman was born after the flesh; but he of the free 
woman was by promise. Which things are an allegory: for these are the two 
covenants; the one from the Mount Sinai, which gendereth to bondage, which is 
Hagar. For this Hagar is Mount Sinai in Arabia, and answereth to Jerusalem 
which now is, and is in bondage with her children. But Jerusalem which is 
above is free, which is the mother of us all;" and so on. And in the same way 
where he reasons thus: "Brethren, I speak after the manner of men: Though it 
be but a man's covenant, yet if it be confirmed, no man disannulleth, or 
addeth thereto. Now to Abraham and his seed were the promises made. He saith 
not, And to seeds, as of many; but as of one, And to thy seed, which is 
Christ. And this I say, that the covenant, that was confirmed before of God in 
Christ, the law, which was four hundred and thirty years after, cannot 
disannul, that it should make the promise of none effect. For if the 
inheritance be of the law, it is no more of promise: but God gave it to 
Abraham by promise." And because it might possibly occur to the hearer to ask, 
If there is no inheritance by the law, why then was the law given? he himself 
anticipates this objection and asks, "Wherefore then serveth the law?" And the 
answer is given: "It was added because of transgressions, till the seed should 
come to whom the promise was made; and it was ordained by angels in the hand 
of a mediator. Now a mediator is not a mediator of one; but God is one." And 
here an objection occurs which he himself has stated: "Is the law then against 
the promises of God?" He answers: "God forbid." And he also states the reason 
in these words: "For if there had been a law given which could have given 
life, verily righteousness should have been by the law. But the Scripture has 
concluded all under sin, that the promise by faith of Jesus Christ might be 
given to them that believe." It is part, then, of the duty of the teacher not 
only to interpret what is obscure, and to unravel the difficulties of 
questions, but also, while doing this, to meet other questions which may 
chance to suggest themselves, lest these should cast doubt or discredit on 
what we say. If, however, the solution of these questions suggest itself as 
soon as the questions themselves arise, it is useless to disturb what we 
cannot remove. And besides, when out of one question other questions arise, 
and out of these again still others; if these be all discussed and solved, the 
reasoning is extended to such a length, that unless the memory be exceedingly 
powerful and active, the reasoner finds it impossible to return to the 
original question from which he set out. It is, however, exceedingly desirable 
that whatever occurs to the mind as an objection that might be urged should be 
stated and refuted, lest it turn up at a time when no one will be present to 
answer it, or lest, if it should occur to a man who is present but says 
nothing about it, it might never be thoroughly removed.</p>

<p class="par" id="xxi_3-p2">40. In the following words of the apostle we have the temperate style: "Rebuke 
not an elder, but entreat him as a father; and the younger men as brethren; 
the elder women as mothers, the younger as sisters." And also in these: "I 
beseech you, therefore, brethren, by the mercies of God, that ye present your 
bodies a living sacrifice, holy, acceptable unto God, which is your reasonable 
service." And almost the whole of this hortatory passage is in the temperate 
style of eloquence; and those parts of it are the most beautiful in which, as 
if paying what was due, things that belong to each other are gracefully 
brought together. For example: "Having then gifts, differing according to the 
grace that is given to us, whether prophecy, let us prophesy according to the 
proportion of faith; or ministry, let us wait on our ministering; or he that 
teacheth, on teaching; or he that exhorteth, on exhortation: he that giveth, 
let him do it with simplicity; he that ruleth, with diligence; he that showeth 
mercy, with cheerfulness. Let love be without dissimulation. Abhor that which 
is evil, cleave to that which is good. Be kindly affectioned one to another 
with brotherly love; in honour preferring one another; not slothful in 
business; fervent in spirit; serving the Lord; rejoicing in hope; patient in 
tribulation; continuing instant in prayer; distributing to the necessity of 
saints; given to hospitality. Bless them which persecute you: bless, and curse 
not. Rejoice with them that do rejoice, and weep with them that weep. Be of 
the same mind one towards another." And how gracefully all this is brought to 
a close in a period of two members: "Mind not high things, but condescend to 
men of low estate!" And a little afterwards: "Render therefore to all their 
dues: tribute to whom tribute is due; custom to whom custom; fear to whom 
fear; honour to whom honour." And these also, though expressed in single 
clauses, are terminated by a period of two members: "Owe no man anything, but 
to love one another." And a little farther on: "The night is far spent, the 
day is at hand: let us therefore cast off the works of darkness, and let us 
put on the armour of light. Let us walk honestly, as in the day; not in 
rioting and drunkenness, not in chambering and wantonness, not in strife and 
envying: but put ye on the Lord Jesus Christ, and make not provision for the 
flesh, to fulfill the lusts thereof." Now if the passage were translated thus, 
"<span lang="LA" id="xxi_3-p2.1">et carnis prividentiam ne in concupiscentiis feceritis</span>", the ear would no 
doubt be gratified with a more harmonious ending; but our translator, with 
more strictness, preferred to retain even the order of the words. And how this 
sounds in the Greek language, in which the apostle spoke, those who are better 
skilled in that tongue may determine. My opinion, however, is, that what has 
been translated to us in the same order of words does not run very 
harmoniously even in the original tongue.</p>

<p class="par" id="xxi_3-p3">41. And, indeed, I must confess that our authors are very defective in that 
grace of speech which consists in harmonious endings. Whether this be the 
fault of the translators, or whether, as I am more inclined to believe, the 
authors designedly avoided such ornaments, I dare not affirm; for I confess I 
do not know. This I know, however, that if any one who is skilled in this 
species of harmony would take the closing sentences of these writers and 
arrange them according to the law of harmony (which he could very easily do by 
changing some words for words of equivalent meaning, or by retaining the words 
he finds and altering their arrangement), he will learn that these 
divinely-inspired men are not defective in any of those points which he has 
been taught in the schools of the grammarians and rhetoricians to consider of 
importance; and he will find in them many kinds of speech of great beauty, 
beautiful even in our language, but especially beautiful in the 
original,—none of which canoe found in those writings of which they boast so 
much. But care must be taken that, while adding harmony, we take away none of 
the weight from these divine and authoritative utterances. Now our prophets 
were so far from being deficient in the musical training from which this 
harmony we speak of is most fully learnt, that Jerome, a very learned man, 
describes even the metres employed by some of them, in the Hebrew language at 
least; though, in order to give an accurate rendering of the words, he has not 
preserved these in his translation. I, however (to speak of my own feeling, 
which is better known to me than it is to others, and than that of others is 
to me), while I do not in my own speech, however modestly I think it done, 
neglect these harmonious endings, am just as well pleased to find them in the 
sacred authors very rarely.</p>

<p class="par" id="xxi_3-p4">42. The majestic style of speech differs from the temperate style just spoken 
of, chiefly in that it is not so much decked out with verbal ornaments as 
exalted into vehemence by mental emotion. It uses, indeed, nearly all the 
ornaments that the other does; but if they do not happen to be at hand, it 
does not seek for them. For it is borne on by its own vehemence; and the force 
of the thought, not the desire for ornament, makes it seize upon any beauty of 
expression that comes in its way. It is enough for its object that warmth of 
feeling should suggest the fitting words; they need not be selected by careful 
elaboration of speech. If a brave man be armed with weapons adorned with gold 
and jewels, he works feats of valor with those arms in the heat of battle, not 
because they are costly, but because they are arms; and yet the same man does 
great execution, even when anger furnishes him with a weapon that he digs out 
of the ground. The apostle in the following passage is urging that, for the 
sake of the ministry of the gospel, and sustained by the consolations of God's 
grace, we should bear with patience all the evils of this life. It is a great 
subject, and is treated with power, and the ornaments of speech are not 
wanting: "Behold," he says, "now is the accepted time; behold, now is the day 
of salvation. Giving no offense in anything, that the ministry be not blamed: 
but in all things approving ourselves as the ministers of God, in much 
patience, in afflictions, in necessities, in distresses, in strifes, in 
imprisonments, in tumults, in labours, in watchings, in fastings; by pureness, 
by knowledge, by longsuffering, by kindness, by the Holy Ghost, by love 
unfeigned, by the word of truth, by the power of God, by the armour of 
righteousness on the right hand and on the left, by honour and dishonour, by 
evil report and good report: as deceivers, and yet true; as unknown, and yet 
well known; as dying, and, behold, we live; as chastened, and not killed; as 
sorrowful, yet alway rejoicing; as poor, yet making many rich; as having 
nothing, and yet possessing all things." See him still burning: "O ye 
Corinthians, our mouth is opened unto you, our heart is enlarged," and so on; 
it would be tedious to go through it all.</p>

<p class="par" id="xxi_3-p5">43. And in the same way, writing to the Romans, he urges that the persecutions 
of this world should be overcome by charity, in assured reliance on the help 
of God. And he treats this subject with both power and beauty: "We know," he 
says, "that all things work together for good to them that love God, to them 
who are the called according to His purpose. For whom He did foreknow, He also 
did predestinate to be conformed to the image of His Son, that He might be the 
firstborn among many brethren. Moreover, whom He did predestinate, them He 
also called; and whom He called, them He also justified; and whom He 
justified, them He also glorified. What shall we then say to these things? If 
God be for us, who can be against us? He that spared not His own Son, but 
delivered Him up for us all, how shall He not with Him also freely give us all 
things? Who shall lay any thing to the charge of Gods elect? It is God that 
justifieth; who is he that condemneth? It is Christ that died, yea, rather, 
that is risen again, who is even at the right hand of God, who also maketh 
intercession for us. Who shall separate us from the love of Christ? Shall 
tribulation, or distress, or persecution, or famine, or nakedness, or peril, 
or sword? (As it is written, For Thy sake we are killed all the day long, we 
are accounted as sheep for the slaughter.) Nay, in all these things we are 
more than conquerors, through Him that loved us. For I am persuaded, that 
neither death, nor life, nor angels, nor principalities, nor powers, nor 
things present, nor things to come, nor height, nor depth, nor any other 
creature, shall be able to separate us from the love of God, which is in 
Christ Jesus our Lord."</p>

<p class="par" id="xxi_3-p6">44. Again, in writing to the Galatians, although the whole epistle is written 
in the subdued style, except at the end, where it rises into a temperate 
eloquence, yet he interposes one passage of so much feeling that, not 
withstanding the absence of any ornaments such as appear in the passages just 
quoted, it cannot be called anything but powerful: "Ye observe days, and 
months, and times, and years. I am afraid of you, lest I have bestowed upon 
you labour in vain. Brethren, I beseech you, be as I am; for I am as ye are: 
ye have not injured me at all. Ye know how, through infirmity of the flesh, I 
preached the gospel unto you at the first. And my temptation which was in my 
flesh ye despised not, nor rejected; but received me as an angel of God, even 
as Christ Jesus. Where is then the blessedness ye spake of? For I bear you 
record, that, if it had been possible, ye would have plucked out your own 
eyes, and have given them to me. Am I therefore become your enemy, because I 
tell you the truth? They zealously affect you, but not well; yea, they would 
exclude you, that ye might affect them. But it is good to be zealously 
affected always in a good thing, and not only when I am preset with you. My 
little children, of whom I travail in birth again until Christ be formed in 
you, I desire to be present with you now, and to change my voice; for I stand 
in doubt of you". Is there anything here of contrasted words arranged 
antithetically, or of words rising gradually to a climax, or of sonorous 
clauses, and sections, and periods? Yet, notwithstanding, there is a glow of 
strong emotion that makes us feel the fervour of eloquence.</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 21. Examples of the various styles, drawn from the  teachers of the church, especially Ambrose and Cyprian" prev="xxi_3" next="xxiii_3" id="xxii_3">

<h3 id="xxii_3-p0.1">Chapter 21</h3>
<p class="par" id="xxii_3-p1">45. But these writings of the apostles, though clear, are yet profound, and 
are so written that one who is not content with a superficial acquaintance, 
but desires to know them thoroughly, must not only read and hear them, but 
must have an expositor. Let us, then, study these various modes of speech as 
they are exemplified in the writings of men who, by reading the Scriptures, 
have attained to the knowledge of divine and saving truth, and have ministered 
it to the Church. Cyprian of blessed memory writes in the subdued style in his 
treatise on the sacrament of the cup. In this book he resolves the question, 
whether the cup of the Lord ought to contain water only, or water mingled with 
wine. But we must quote a passage by way of illustration. After the customary 
introduction, he proceeds to the discussion of the point in question. 
"Observe," he says, "that we are instructed, in presenting the cup, to 
maintain the custom handed down to us from the Lord, and to do nothing that 
our Lord has not first done for us: so that the cup which is offered in 
remembrance of Him should be mixed with wine. For, as Christ says, 'I am the 
true vine,' it follows that the blood of Christ is wine, not water; and the 
cup cannot appear to contain His blood by which we are redeemed and quickened, 
if the wine be absent; for by the wine is the blood of Christ typified, that 
blood which is foreshadowed and proclaimed in all the types and declarations 
of Scripture. For we find that in the book of Genesis this very circumstance 
in regard to the sacrament is foreshadowed, and our Lord's sufferings 
typically set forth, in the case of Noah, when he drank wine, and was drunken, 
and was uncovered within his tent, and his nakedness was exposed by his second 
son, and was carefully hidden by his elder and his younger sons. It is not 
necessary to mention the other circumstances in detail, as it is only 
necessary to observe this point, that Noah, foreshadowing the future reality, 
drank, not water, but wine, and thus showed forth our Lord's passion. In the 
same way we see the sacrament of the Lord's supper prefigured in the case of 
Melchizedek the priest, according to the testimony of the Holy Scriptures, 
where it says: 'And Melchizedek king of Salem brought forth bread and wine: 
and he was the priest of the most high God. And he blessed Abraham.' Now, that 
Melchizedek was a type of Christ, the Holy Spirit declares in the Psalms, 
where the Father addressing the Son says, 'Thou art a priest forever after the 
order of Melchizedek.'" In this passage, and in all of the letter that 
follows, the subdued style is maintained, as the reader may easily satisfy 
himself.</p>

<p class="par" id="xxii_3-p2">46. St. Ambrose also, though dealing with a question of very great importance, 
the equality of the Holy Spirit with the Father and the Son, employs the 
subdued style, because the object he has in view demands, not beauty of 
diction, nor the swaying of the mind by the stir of emotion, but facts and 
proofs. Accordingly, in the introduction to his work, we find the following 
passage among others: "When Gideon was startled by the message he had heard 
from God, that, though thousands of the people failed, yet through one man God 
would deliver His people from their enemies, he brought forth a kid of the 
goats, and by direction of the angel laid it with unleavened cakes upon a 
rock, and poured the broth over it; and as soon as the angel of God touched it 
with the end of the staff that was in his hand, there rose up fire out of the 
rock and consumed the offering. Now this sign seems to indicate that the rock 
was a type of the body of Christ, for it is written, 'They drank of that 
spiritual rock that followed them, and that rock was Christ;' this, of course, 
referring not to Christ's divine nature, but to His flesh, whose ever-flowing 
fountain of blood has ever satisfied the hearts of His thirsting people. And 
so it was at that time declared in a mystery that the Lord Jesus, when 
crucified, should abolish in His flesh the sins of the whole world, and not 
their guilty acts merely, but the evil lusts of their hearts. For the kid's 
flesh refers to the guilt of the outward act, the broth to the allurement of 
lust within, as it is written, 'And the mixed multitude that was among them 
fell a lusting; and the children of Israel also wept again and said, Who shall 
give us flesh to eat?' When the angel, then, stretched out his staff and 
touched the rock, and fire rose out of it, this was a sign that our Lord's 
flesh, filled with the Spirit of God, should burn up all the sins of the human 
race. Whence also the Lord says, 'I am come to send fire on the earth.'" And 
in the same style he pursues the subject, devoting himself chiefly to proving 
and enforcing his point.</p>

<p class="par" id="xxii_3-p3">47. An example of the temperate style is the celebrated encomium on virginity 
from Cyprian: "Now our discourse addresses itself to the virgins, who, as they 
are the objects of higher honour, are also the objects of greater care. These 
are the flowers on the tree of the Church, the glory and ornament of spiritual 
grace, the joy of honour and praise, a work unbroken and unblemished, the 
image of God answering to the holiness of the Lord, the brighter portion of 
the flock of Christ. The glorious fruitfulness of their mother the Church 
rejoices in them, and in them flourishes more abundantly; and in proportion as 
bright virginity adds to her numbers, in the same proportion does the mother's 
joy increase." And at another place in the end of the epistle, "As we have 
borne," he says, "the image of the earthly, we shall also bear the image of 
the heavenly." Virginity bears this image, integrity bears it, holiness and 
truth bear it; they bear it who are mindful of the chastening of the Lord, who 
observe justice and piety, who are strong in faith, humble in fear, steadfast 
in the endurance of suffering, meek in the endurance of injury, ready to pity, 
of one mind and of one heart in brotherly peace. And every one of these things 
ought ye, holy virgins, to obscene, to cherish, and fulfill, who having hearts 
at leisure for God and for Christ, and having chosen the greater and better 
part, lead and point the way to the Lord, to whom you have pledged your vows. 
Ye who are advanced in age, exercise control over the younger. Ye who are 
younger, wait upon the elders, and encourage your equals; stir up one another 
by mutual exhortations; provoke one another to glory by emulous examples of 
virtue; endure bravely, advance in spirituality, finish your course with joy; 
only be mindful of us when your virginity shall begin to reap its reward of 
honour."</p>

<p class="par" id="xxii_3-p4">48. Ambrose also uses the temperate and ornamented style when he is holding up 
before virgins who have made their profession a model for their imitation, and 
says: "She was a virgin not in body only, but also in mind; not mingling the 
purity of her affection with any dross of hypocrisy; serious in speech; 
prudent in disposition; sparing of words; delighting in study; not placing her 
confidence in uncertain riches, but in the prayer of the poor; diligent in 
labour; reverent in word; accustomed to look to God, not man, as the guide of 
her conscience; injuring no one, wishing well to all; dutiful to her elders, 
not envious of her equals; avoiding boastfulness, following reason, loving 
virtue. When did she wound her parents even by a look? When did she quarrel 
with her neighbours? When did she spurn the humble, laugh at the weak, or shun 
the indigent? She is accustomed to visit only those haunts of men that pity 
would not blush for, nor modesty pass by. There is nothing haughty in her 
eyes, nothing bold in her words, nothing wanton in her gestures: her bearing 
is not voluptuous, nor her gait too free, nor her voice petulant; so that her 
outward appearance is an image of her mind, and a picture of purity. For a 
good house ought to be known for such at the very threshold, and show at the 
very entrance that there is no dark recess within, as the light of a lamp set 
inside sheds its radiance on the outside. Why need I detail her sparingness in 
food, her superabundance in duty,—the one falling beneath the demands of 
nature, the other rising above its powers? The latter has no intervals of 
intermission, the former doubles the days by fasting; and when the desire for 
refreshment does arise, it is satisfied with food such as will support life, 
but not minister to appetite." Now I have cited these latter passages as 
examples of the temperate style, because their purpose is not to induce those 
who have not yet devoted themselves to take the vows of virginity, but to show 
of what character those who have taken vows ought to be. To prevail on any one 
to take a step of such a nature and of so great importance, requires that the 
mind should be excited and set on fire by the majestic style. Cyprian the 
martyr, however, did not write about the duty of taking up the profession of 
virginity, but about the dress and deportment of virgins. Yet that great 
bishop urges them to their duty even in these respects by the power of a 
majestic eloquence.</p>

<p class="par" id="xxii_3-p5">49. But I shall select examples of the majestic style from their treatment of 
a subject which both of them have touched. Both have denounced the women who 
colour, or rather discolour, their faces with paint. And the first, in dealing 
with this topic, says: "Suppose a painter should depict in colours that rival 
nature's the features and form and completion of some man, and that, when the 
portrait had been finished with consummate art, another painter should put his 
hand over it, as if to improve by his superior skill the painting already 
completed; surely the first artist would feel deeply insulted, and his 
indignation would be justly roused. Dost thou, then, think that thou wilt 
carry off with impunity so audacious an act of wickedness, such an insult to 
God the great artifices? For, granting that thou art not immodest in thy 
behaviour towards men, and that thou art not polluted in mind by these 
meretricious deceits, yet, in corrupting and violating what is God's, thou 
provest thyself worse than an adulteress. The fact that thou considerest 
thyself adorned and beautified by such arts is an impeachment of God's 
handiwork, and a violation of truth. Listen to the warning voice of the 
apostle: 'Purge out the old leaven, that ye may be a new lump, as ye are 
unleavened. For even Christ our Passover is sacrificed for us: therefore let 
us keep the feast, not with old leaven, neither with the leaven of malice and 
wickedness; but with the unleavened bread of sincerity and truth.' Now can 
sincerity and truth continue to exist when what is sincere is polluted, and 
what is true is changed by meretricious colouring and the deceptions of 
quackery into a lie? Thy Lord says, 'Thou can't not make one hair white or 
black;' and dost thou wish to have greater power so as to bring to nought the 
words of thy Lord? With rash and sacrilegious hand thou wouldst fain change 
the colour of thy hair: I would that, with a prophetic look to the future, 
thou shouldst dye it the color of flame." It would be too long to quote all 
that follows.</p>

<p class="par" id="xxii_3-p6">50. Ambrose again, inveighing against such practices, says: "Hence arise these 
incentives to vice, that women, in their fear that they may not prove 
attractive to men, paint their faces with carefully-chosen colours, and then 
from stains on their features go on to stains on their chastity. What folly it 
is to change the features of nature into those of a painting, and from fear of 
incurring their husband's disapproval, to proclaim openly that they have 
incurred their own! For the woman who desires to alter her natural appearance 
pronounces condemnation on herself; and her eager endeavours to please another 
prove that she has first been displeasing to herself. And what testimony to 
thine ugliness can we find, O woman, that is more unquestionable than thine 
own, when thou art afraid to show thyself? If thou art comely why dost thou 
hide thy comeliness? If thou art plain, why test thou lyingly pretend to be 
beautiful, when thou can't not enjoy the pleasure of the lie either in thine 
own consciousness or in that of another? For he loves another woman, thou 
desires to please another man; and thou art angry if he love another, though 
he is taught adultery in thee. Thou art the evil promptress of thine own 
injury. For even the woman who has been the victim of a pander shrinks from 
acting the pander's part, and though she be vile, it is herself she sins 
against and not another. The crime of adultery is almost more tolerable than 
thine; for adultery tampers with modesty, but thou with nature." It is 
sufficiently clear, I think, that this eloquence calls passionately upon women 
to avoid tampering with their appearance by deceitful arts, and to cultivate 
modesty and fear. Accordingly, we notice that the style is neither subdued nor 
temperate, but majestic throughout. Now in these two authors whom I have 
selected as specimens of the rest, and in other ecclesiastical writers who 
both speak the truth and speak it well,—speak it, that is, judiciously, 
pointedly, and with beauty and power of expression,—many examples may be 
found of the three styles of speech, scattered through their various writings 
and discourses; and the diligent student may by assiduous reading, 
intermingled with practice on his own part, become thoroughly imbued with them 
all.</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 22. The necessity of variety in style" prev="xxii_3" next="xxiv_3" id="xxiii_3">

<h3 id="xxiii_3-p0.1">Chapter 22</h3>
<p class="par" id="xxiii_3-p1">51. But we are not to suppose that it is against rule to mingle these various 
styles: on the contrary, every variety of style should be introduced so far as 
is consistent with good taste. For when we keep monotonously to one style, we 
fail to retain the hearer's attention; but when we pass from one style to 
another, the discourse goes off more gracefully, even though it extend to 
greater length. Each separate style, again, has varieties of its own which 
prevent the hearer's attention from cooling or becoming languid. We can bear 
the subdued style, however, longer without variety than the majestic style. 
For the mental emotion which it is necessary to stir up in order to carry the 
hearer's feelings with us, when once it has been sufficiently excited, the 
higher the pitch to which it is raised, can be maintained the shorter time. 
And therefore we must be on our guard, lest, in striving to carry to a higher 
point the emotion we have excited, we rather lose what we have already gained. 
But after the interposition of matter that we have to treat in a quieter 
style, we can return with good effect to that which must be treated forcibly, 
thus making the tide of eloquence to ebb and flow like the sea. It follows 
from this, that the majestic style, if it is to be long continued, ought not 
to be unvaried, but should alternate at intervals with the other styles; the 
speech or writing as a whole, however, being referred to that style which is 
the prevailing one.</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 23. How the various styles should be mingled" prev="xxiii_3" next="xxv_3" id="xxiv_3">
<h3 id="xxiv_3-p0.1">Chapter 23</h3>
<p class="par" id="xxiv_3-p1">52. Now it is a matter of importance to determine what style should be 
alternated with what other, and the places where it is necessary that any 
particular style should be used. In the majestic style, for instance, it is 
always, or almost always, desirable that the introduction should be temperate. 
And the speaker has it in his discretion to use the subdued style even where 
the majestic would be allowable, in order that the majestic when it is used 
may be the more majestic by comparison and may as it were shine out with 
greater brilliance from the dark background. Again, whatever may be the style 
of the speech or writing, when knotty questions turn up for solution, accuracy 
of distinction is required, and this naturally demands the subdued style. And 
accordingly this style must be used in alternation with the other two styles 
whenever questions of that sort turn up; just as we must use the temperate 
style, no matter what may be the general tone of the discourse, whenever 
praise or blame is to be given without any ulterior reference to the 
condemnation or acquittal of any one, or to obtaining the concurrence of any 
one in a course of action. In the majestic style, then, and in the quiet 
likewise, both the other two styles occasionally find place. The temperate 
style, on the other hand, not indeed always, but occasionally, needs the quiet 
style; for example, when, as I have said, a knotty question comes up to be 
settled, or when some points that are susceptible of ornament are left 
unadorned and expressed in the quiet style, in order to give greater effect to 
certain exuberances (as they may be called) of ornament. But the temperate 
style never needs the aid of the majestic; for its object is to gratify, never 
to excite, the mind.</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 24. The effects produced by the majestic style" prev="xxiv_3" next="xxvi_3" id="xxv_3">
<h3 id="xxv_3-p0.1">Chapter 24</h3>
<p class="par" id="xxv_3-p1">53. If frequent and vehement applause follows a speaker, we are not to suppose 
on that account that he is speaking in the majestic style; for this effect is 
often produced both by the accurate distinctions of the quiet style, and by 
the beauties of the temperate. The majestic style, on the other hand, 
frequently silences the audience by its impressiveness, but calls forth their 
tears. For example, when at Caesarean in Mauritania I was dissuading the 
people from that civil, or worse than civil, war which they called Ceterva 
(for it was not fellow-citizens merely, but neighbours, brothers, fathers and 
sons even, who, divided into two factions and armed with stones, fought 
annually at a certain season of the year for several days continuously, every 
one killing whomsoever he could), I strove with all the vehemence of speech 
that I could command to root out and drive from their hearts and lives an evil 
so cruel and inveterate; it was not, however, when I heard their applause, but 
when I saw their tears, that I thought I had produced an effect. For the 
applause showed that they were instructed and delighted, but the tears that 
they were subdued. And when I saw their tears I was confident, even before the 
event proved it, that this horrible and barbarous custom (which had been 
handed down to them from their fathers and their ancestors of generations long 
gone by and which like an enemy was besieging their hearts, or rather had 
complete possession of them) was overthrown; and immediately that my sermon 
was finished I called upon them with heart and voice to give praise and thanks 
to God. And, lo, with the blessing of Christ, it is now eight years or more 
since anything of the sort was attempted there. In many other cases besides I 
have observed that men show the effect made on them by the powerful eloquence 
of a wise man, not by clamorous applause so much as by groans, sometimes even 
by tears, finally by change of life.</p>

<p class="par" id="xxv_3-p2">54. The quiet style, too, has made a change in many; but it was to teach them 
what they were ignorant of, or to persuade them of what they thought 
incredible, not to make them do what they knew they ought to do but were 
unwilling to do. To break down hardness of this sort, speech needs to be 
vehement. Praise and censure, too, when they are eloquently expressed, even in 
the temperate style, produce such an effect on some, that they are not only 
pleased with the eloquence of the encomiums and censures, but are led to live 
so as themselves to deserve praise, and to avoid living so as to incur blame. 
But no one would say that all who are thus delighted change their habits in 
consequence, whereas all who are moved by the majestic style act accordingly, 
and all who are taught by the quiet style know or believe a truth which they 
were previously ignorant of.</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 25. How the temperate style is to be used" prev="xxv_3" next="xxvii_3" id="xxvi_3">
<h3 id="xxvi_3-p0.1">Chapter 25</h3>
<p class="par" id="xxvi_3-p1">55. From all this we may conclude, that the end arrived at by the two styles 
last mentioned is the one which it is most essential for those who aspire to 
speak with wisdom and eloquence to secure. On the other hand, what the 
temperate style properly aims at, viz., to please by beauty of expressions, is 
not in itself an adequate end; but when what we have to say is good and 
useful, and when the hearers are both acquainted with it and favourably 
disposed towards it, so that it is not necessary either to instruct or 
persuade them, beauty of style may have its influence in securing their 
prompter compliance, or in making them adhere to it more tenaciously. For as 
the function of all eloquence, whichever of these three forms it may assume, 
is to speak persuasively, and its object is to persuade, an eloquent man will 
speak persuasively, whatever style he may adopt; but unless he succeeds in 
persuading, his eloquence has not secured its object. Now in the subdued 
style, he persuades his hearers that what he says is true; in the majestic 
style, he persuades them to do what they are aware they ought to do, but do 
not; in the temperate style, he persuades them that his speech is elegant and 
ornate. But what use is there in attaining such an object as this last? They 
may desire it who are vain of their eloquence and make a boast of panegyrics, 
and suchlike performances, where the object is not to instruct the hearer, or 
to persuade him to any course of action, but merely to give him pleasure. We, 
however, ought to make that end subordinate to another, viz., the effecting by 
this style of eloquence what we aim at effecting when we use the majestic 
style. For we may by the use of this style persuade men to cultivate good 
habits and give up evil ones, if they are not so hardened as to need the 
vehement style; or if they have already begun a good course, we may induce 
them to pursue it more zealously, and to persevere in it with constancy. 
Accordingly, even in the temperate style we must use beauty of expression not 
for ostentation, but for wise ends; not contenting ourselves merely with 
pleasing the hearer, but rather seeking to aid him in the pursuit of the good 
end which we hold out before him.</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 26. In every style the orator should aim at perspicuity, beauty, and persuasiveness" prev="xxvi_3" next="xxviii_3" id="xxvii_3">
<h3 id="xxvii_3-p0.1">Chapter 26</h3>
<p class="par" id="xxvii_3-p1">56. Now in regard to the three conditions I laid down a little while ago as 
necessary to be fulfilled by any one who wishes to speak with wisdom and 
eloquence, viz. perspicuity, beauty of style, and persuasive power, we are not 
to understand that these three qualities attach themselves respectively to the 
three several styles of speech, one to each, so that perspicuity is a merit 
peculiar to the subdued style, beauty to the temperate, and persuasive power 
to the majestic. On the contrary, all speech, whatever its style, ought 
constantly to aim at, and as far as possible to display, all these three 
merits. For we do not like even what we say in the subdued style to pall upon 
the hearer; and therefore we would be listened to, not with intelligence 
merely, but with pleasure as well. Again, why do we enforce what we teach by 
divine testimony, except that we wish to carry the hearer with us, that is, to 
compel his assert by calling in the assistance of Him of whom it is said, "Thy 
testimonies are very sure"? And when any one narrates a story, even in the 
subdued style, what does he wish but to be believed? But who will listen to 
him if he do not arrest attention by some beauty of style? And if he be not 
intelligible, is it not plain that he can neither give pleasure nor enforce 
conviction? The subdued style, again, in its own naked simplicity, when it 
unravels questions of very great difficulty, and throws an unexpected light 
upon them; when it worms out and brings to light some very acute observations 
from a quarter whence nothing was expected; when it seizes upon and exposes 
the falsity of an opposing opinion, which seemed at its first statement to be 
unassailable; especially when all this is accompanied by a natural, unsought 
grace of expression, and by a rhythm and balance of style which is not 
ostentatiously obtruded, but seems rather to be called forth by the nature of 
the subject: this style, so used, frequently calls forth applause so great 
that one can hardly believe it to be the subdued style. For the fact that it 
comes forth without either ornament or defense, and offers battle in its own 
naked simplicity, does not hinder it from crushing its adversary by weight of 
nerve and muscle, and overwhelming and destroying the falsehood that opposes 
it by the mere strength of its own right arm. How explain the frequent and 
vehement applause that waits upon men who speak thus, except by the pleasure 
that truth so irresistibly established, and so victoriously defended, 
naturally affords? Wherefore the Christian teacher speaker ought, when he uses 
the subdued style, to endeavour not only to be clear and intelligible, but to 
give pleasure and to bring home conviction to the hearer.</p>

<p class="par" id="xxvii_3-p2">57. Eloquence of the temperate style, also, must, in the case of the Christian 
orator, be neither altogether without ornament, nor unsuitably adorned, nor is 
it to make the giving of pleasure its sole aim, which is all it professes to 
accomplish in the hands of others; but in its encomiums and censures it should 
aim at inducing the hearer to strive after or hold more firmly by what it 
praises, and to avoid or renounce what it condemns. On the other hand, without 
perspicuity this style cannot give pleasure. And so the three qualities, 
perspicuity, beauty, and persuasiveness, are to be sought in this style also; 
beauty, of course, being its primary object.</p>

<p class="par" id="xxvii_3-p3">58. Again, when it becomes necessary to stir and sway the hearer's mind by the 
majestic style (and this is always necessary when he admits that what you say 
is both true and agreeable, and yet is unwilling to act accordingly), you 
must, of course, speak in the majestic style. But who can be moved if he does 
not understand what is said? And who will stay to listen if he receives no 
pleasure? Wherefore, in this style, too, when an obdurate heart is to be 
persuaded to obedience, you must speak so as to be both intelligible and 
pleasing, if you would be heard with a submissive mind.</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 27. The man whose life is in harmony with his teaching  will teach with greater effect" prev="xxvii_3" next="xxix_3" id="xxviii_3">
<h3 id="xxviii_3-p0.1">Chapter 27</h3>
<p class="par" id="xxviii_3-p1">59. But whatever may be the majesty of the style, the life of the speaker will 
count for more in securing the hearer's compliance. The man who speaks wisely 
and eloquently, but lives wickedly, may, it is true, instruct many who are 
anxious to learn; though, as it is written, he "is unprofitable to himself." 
Wherefore, also, the apostle says: "Whether in pretence or in truth Christ is 
preached." Now Christ is the truth; yet we see that the truth can be preached, 
though not in truth, that is, what is right and true in itself may be preached 
by a man of perverse and deceitful mind. And thus it is that Jesus Christ is 
preached by those that seek their own, and not the things that are Jesus 
Christ's. But since true believers obey the voice, not of any man, but of the 
Lord Himself, who says, "All therefore whatsoever they bid you observe, that 
observe and do: but do not ye after their works; for they say and do not;" and 
therefore it is that men who themselves lead unprofitable lives are heard with 
profit by others. For though they seek their own objects, they do not dare to 
teach their own doctrines, sitting as they do in the high places of 
ecclesiastical authority, which is established on sound doctrine. Wherefore 
our Lord Himself, before saying what I have just quoted about men of this 
stamp, made this observation: "The scribes and the Pharisees sit in Moses's 
seat." The seat they occupied then, which was not theirs but Moses', compelled 
them to say what was good, though they did what was evil. And so they followed 
their own course in their lives, but were prevented by the seat they occupied, 
which belonged to another, from preaching their own doctrines.</p>

<p class="par" id="xxviii_3-p2">60. Now these men do good to many by preaching what they themselves do not 
perform; but they would do good to very many more if they lived as they 
preach. For there are numbers who seek an excuse for their own evil lives in 
comparing the teaching with the conduct of their instructors, and who say in 
their hearts, or even go a little further, and say with their lips: Why do you 
not do yourself what you bid me do? And thus they cease to listen with 
submission to a man who does not listen to himself, and in despising the 
preacher they learn to despise the word that is preached. Wherefore the 
apostle, writing to Timothy, after telling him, "Let no man despise thy 
youth," adds immediately the course by which he would avoid contempt: "but be 
thou an example of the believers, in word, in conversation, in charity, in 
spirit, in faith, in purity."</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 28. Truth is more important than expression. What is meant by strife about words" prev="xxviii_3" next="xxx_3" id="xxix_3">
<h3 id="xxix_3-p0.1">Chapter 28</h3>
<p class="par" id="xxix_3-p1">61. Such a teacher as is here described may, to secure compliance, speak not 
only quietly and temperately, but even vehemently, without any breach of 
modesty, because his life protects him against contempt. For while he pursues 
an upright life, he takes care to maintain a good reputation as well, 
providing things honest in the sight of God and men, fearing God, and caring 
for men. In his very speech even he prefers to please by matter rather than by 
words; thinks that a thing is well said in proportion as it is true in fact, 
and that a teacher should govern his words, not let the words govern him. This 
is what the apostle says: "Not with wisdom of words, lest the cross of Christ 
should be made of none effect." To the same effect also is what he says to 
Timothy: "Charging them before the Lord that they strive not about words to no 
profit, but to the subverting of the hearers." Now this does not mean that, 
when adversaries oppose the truth, we are to say nothing in defense of the 
truth. For where, then, would be what he says when he is describing the sort 
of man a bishop ought to be: "that he may be able by sound doctrine both to 
exhort and convince the gainsayers?" To strive about words is not to be 
careful about the way to overcome error by truth, but to be anxious that your 
mode of expression should be preferred to that of another. The man who does 
not strive about words, whether he speak quietly, temperately, or vehemently, 
uses words with no other purpose than to make the truth plain, pleasing and 
effective; for not even love itself, which is the end of the commandment and 
the fulfilling of the law, can be rightly exercised unless the objects of love 
are true and not false. For as a man with a comely body but an ill-conditioned 
mind is a more painful object than if his body too were deformed, so men who 
teach lies are the more pitiable if they happen to be eloquent in speech. To 
speak eloquently, then, and wisely as well, is just to express truths which it 
is expedient to teach in fit and proper words,—words which in the subdued 
style are adequate, in the temperate, elegant, and in the majestic, forcible. 
But the man who cannot speak both eloquently and wisely should speak wisely 
without eloquence, rather than eloquently without wisdom.</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 29. It is permissible for a preacher to deliver to the people what has been written by a more eloquent man than himself" prev="xxix_3" next="xxxi_3" id="xxx_3">
<h3 id="xxx_3-p0.1">Chapter 29</h3>
<p class="Body" id="xxx_3-p1">If, however, he cannot do even this, let his life be such as shall not only 
secure a reward for himself, but afford an example to others; and let his 
manner of living be an eloquent sermon in itself.</p>

<p class="par" id="xxx_3-p2">62. There are, indeed, some men who have a good delivery, but cannot compose 
anything to deliver. Now, if such men take what has been written with wisdom 
and eloquence by others, and commit it to memory, and deliver it to the 
people, they cannot be blamed, supposing them to do it without deception. For 
in this way many become preachers of the truth (which is certainly desirable), 
and yet not many teachers; for all deliver the discourse which one real 
teacher has composed, and there are no divisions among them. Nor are such men 
to be alarmed by the words of Jeremiah the prophet, through whom God denounces 
those who steal His words every one from his neighbour. For those who steal 
take what does not belong to them, but the word of God belongs to all who obey 
it; and it is the man who speaks well, but lives badly, who really takes the 
words that belong to another. For the good things he says seem to be the 
result of his own thought, and yet they have nothing in common with his manner 
of life. And so God has said that they steal His words who would appear good 
by speaking God's words, but are in fact bad, as they follow their own ways. 
And if you look closely into the matter, it is not really themselves who say 
the good things they say. For how can they say in words what they deny in 
deeds? It is not for nothing that the apostle says of such men: "They profess 
that they know God, but in works they deny Him." In one sense, then, they do 
say the things, and in another sense they do not say them; for both these 
statements must be true, both being made by Him who is the Truth. Speaking of 
such men, in one place He says, "Whatsoever they bid you observe, that observe 
and do; but do not ye after their works; "that is to say, what ye hear from 
their lips, that do; what ye see in their lives, that do ye not;—"for they 
say and do not." And so, though they do not, yet they say. But in another 
place, upbraiding such men, He says, "O generation of vipers, how can ye, 
being evil, speak good things?" And from this it would appear that even what 
they say, when they say what is good, it is not themselves who say, for in 
will and in deed they deny what they say. Hence it happens that a wicked man 
who is eloquent may compose a discourse in which the truth is set forth to be 
delivered by a good man who is not eloquent; and when this takes place, the 
former draws from himself what does not belong to him, and the latter receives 
from another what really belongs to himself. But when true believers render 
this service to true believers, both parties speak what is their own, for God 
is theirs, to whom belongs all that they say; and even those who could not 
compose what they say make it their own by composing their lives in harmony 
with it.</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 30. The preacher should commence his discourse with prayer to God" prev="xxx_3" next="xxxii_3" id="xxxi_3">
<h3 id="xxxi_3-p0.1">Chapter 30</h3>
<p class="par" id="xxxi_3-p1">63. But whether a man is going to address the people or to dictate what others 
will deliver or read to the people, he ought to pray God to put into his mouth 
a suitable discourse. For if Queen Esther prayed, when she was about to speak 
to the king touching the temporal welfare of her race, that God would put fit 
words into her mouth, how much more ought he to pray for the same blessing who 
labours in word and doctrine for the eternal welfare of men? Those, again, who 
are to deliver what others compose for them ought, before they receive their 
discourse, to pray for those who are preparing it; and when they have received 
it, they ought to pray both that they themselves may deliver it well, and that 
those to whom they address it may give ear; and when the discourse has a happy 
issue, they ought to render thanks to Him from whom they know such blessings 
come, so that all the praise may be His "in whose hand are both we and our 
words."</p> 
</div3>

<div3 title="Chap. 31. Apology for the length of the work" prev="xxxi_3" next="xliv" id="xxxii_3">
<h3 id="xxxii_3-p0.1">Chapter 31</h3>
<p class="par" id="xxxii_3-p1">64. This book has extended to a greater length than I expected or desired. But 
the reader or hearer who finds pleasure in it will not think it long. He who 
thinks it long, but is anxious to know its contents, may read it in parts. He 
who does not care to be acquainted with it need not complain of its length. I, 
however, give thanks to God that with what little ability I possess I have in 
these four books striven to depict, not the sort of man I am myself (for my 
defects are very many), but the sort of man he ought to be who desires to 
labour in sound, that is, in Christian doctrine, not for his own instruction 
only, but for that of others also.</p> 


<p style="text-align:center" id="xxxii_3-p2">End of - On Christian Doctrine</p>
</div3>
</div2>
</div1>


<div1 title="Indexes" prev="xxxii_3" next="xliv.i" id="xliv">
<h1 id="xliv-p0.1">Indexes</h1>

<div2 title="Latin Words and Phrases" prev="xliv" next="toc" id="xliv.i">
  <h2 id="xliv.i-p0.1">Index of Latin Words and Phrases</h2>
  <insertIndex type="foreign" lang="LA" id="xliv.i-p0.2" />



<div class="Index">
<ul class="Index1">
 <li>"per vestram" juro "gloriam": 
  <a class="TOC" href="#v_2-p1.7">1</a></li>
 <li>Deus: 
  <a class="TOC" href="#vi-p1.1">1</a></li>
 <li>In principio erat verbum, et verbum erat apud Deum, et Deus erat: 
  <a class="TOC" href="#iv.iv.iii-p2.1">1</a></li>
 <li>Non congregabo conventicula eorum de sanguinibus: 
  <a class="TOC" href="#xi_3-p1.1">1</a></li>
 <li>Propterea consolati sumus fratres in vobis: 
  <a class="TOC" href="#v_2-p1.1">1</a></li>
 <li>Quae est terra in qua isti insidunt super eam, si bona est an nequam; et quae sunt civitates, in quibus ipsi inhabitant in ipsis?: 
  <a class="TOC" href="#xiv_1-p2.1">1</a></li>
 <li>Quod stultum est Dei, sapientius est hominibus, et quod infirmum est Dei, fortius est hominibus": 
  <a class="TOC" href="#xiv_1-p2.7">1</a></li>
 <li>Quod stultum est Dei, sapientius est hominum et quo infirmum est Dei fortius est hominum: 
  <a class="TOC" href="#xiv_1-p2.9">1</a></li>
 <li>Super ipsum autem floriet sanctificatio mea: 
  <a class="TOC" href="#xiv_1-p2.3">1</a></li>
 <li>Verbum hoc erat in principio apud Deum: 
  <a class="TOC" href="#iv.iv.iii-p2.2">1</a></li>
 <li>ambitus sive circuitus: 
  <a class="TOC" href="#viii_3-p1.4">1</a></li>
 <li>bos: 
  <a class="TOC" href="#xi_1-p1.1">1</a></li>
 <li>caesum: 
  <a class="TOC" href="#viii_3-p3.1">1</a></li>
 <li>compellor autem ex duobus: 
  <a class="TOC" href="#iv.iv.iii-p3.2">1</a></li>
 <li>concupiscentiam habens dissolvi, et esse cum Christo: 
  <a class="TOC" href="#iv.iv.iii-p3.3">1</a>
  <a class="TOC" href="#iv.iv.iii-p3.7">2</a></li>
 <li>denim: 
  <a class="TOC" href="#iv.iv.iii-p3.5">1</a></li>
 <li>et Deus erat verbum: 
  <a class="TOC" href="#iv.iv.iii-p2.3">1</a></li>
 <li>et carnis prividentiam ne in concupiscentiis feceritis: 
  <a class="TOC" href="#xxi_3-p2.1">1</a></li>
 <li>et quid eligam ignoro: compellor autem ex duobus: 
  <a class="TOC" href="#iv.iv.iii-p3.6">1</a></li>
 <li>et spiritus perficientes sanctificationem in timore Dei capite nos: 
  <a class="TOC" href="#iv.iv.iii-p4.3">1</a></li>
 <li>ex duobus concupiscentiam habens: 
  <a class="TOC" href="#iv.iv.iii-p3.1">1</a></li>
 <li>florebit: 
  <a class="TOC" href="#xiv_1-p2.6">1</a></li>
 <li>floriet: 
  <a class="TOC" href="#xiv_1-p2.5">1</a></li>
 <li>fortius est quam homines: 
  <a class="TOC" href="#xiv_1-p2.12">1</a></li>
 <li>fratres: 
  <a class="TOC" href="#v_2-p1.2">1</a></li>
 <li>genethliaci: 
  <a class="TOC" href="#xxii_1-p1.1">1</a>
  <a class="TOC" href="#xxx_1-p2.1">2</a></li>
 <li>gradatio: 
  <a class="TOC" href="#viii_3-p1.1">1</a></li>
 <li>hoc erat in principio apud Deum: 
  <a class="TOC" href="#iv.iv.iii-p2.4">1</a></li>
 <li>ignoscere: 
  <a class="TOC" href="#xiv_1-p1.1">1</a></li>
 <li>lucus: 
  <a class="TOC" href="#xxx_2-p2.1">1</a></li>
 <li>manere in carne necessarium propter vos: 
  <a class="TOC" href="#iv.iv.iii-p3.9">1</a></li>
 <li>mathematici: 
  <a class="TOC" href="#xxii_1-p1.2">1</a></li>
 <li>membra et caesa: 
  <a class="TOC" href="#viii_3-p1.3">1</a></li>
 <li>membrum: 
  <a class="TOC" href="#viii_3-p3.2">1</a></li>
 <li>multo enim magis optimum: 
  <a class="TOC" href="#iv.iv.iii-p3.4">1</a>
  <a class="TOC" href="#iv.iv.iii-p3.8">2</a></li>
 <li>mundemus nos ab omni coinquinatione carnis et spiritus: 
  <a class="TOC" href="#iv.iv.iii-p4.1">1</a></li>
 <li>mundemus nos ab omni coinquintione carnis: 
  <a class="TOC" href="#iv.iv.iii-p4.2">1</a></li>
 <li>non est absconditum a te ossum meum: 
  <a class="TOC" href="#iv.iv.iv-p2.5">1</a></li>
 <li>nostri: 
  <a class="TOC" href="#v_2-p1.4">1</a></li>
 <li>ora: 
  <a class="TOC" href="#iv.iv.iv-p2.4">1</a>
  <a class="TOC" href="#xi_3-p1.4">2</a></li>
 <li>os: 
  <a class="TOC" href="#iv.iv.iv-p2.2">1</a></li>
 <li>os meum: 
  <a class="TOC" href="#iv.iv.iv-p2.1">1</a></li>
 <li>ossa: 
  <a class="TOC" href="#iv.iv.iv-p2.3">1</a>
  <a class="TOC" href="#xi_3-p1.3">2</a></li>
 <li>ossum": 
  <a class="TOC" href="#xi_3-p1.2">1</a></li>
 <li>per vestram gloriam: 
  <a class="TOC" href="#v_2-p1.6">1</a></li>
 <li>praedico: 
  <a class="TOC" href="#iv.iv.iv-p2.6">1</a></li>
 <li>praedixi: 
  <a class="TOC" href="#iv.iv.iv-p2.7">1</a></li>
 <li>propterea consolationem habuimus fratres in vobis: 
  <a class="TOC" href="#v_2-p1.3">1</a>
  <a class="TOC" href="#v_2-p1.5">2</a></li>
 <li>quae praedico vobis: 
  <a class="TOC" href="#iv.iv.iv-p2.8">1</a></li>
 <li>sapientius est hominibus: 
  <a class="TOC" href="#xiv_1-p2.10">1</a></li>
 <li>sapientius est quam homines: 
  <a class="TOC" href="#xiv_1-p2.11">1</a></li>
 <li>scala: 
  <a class="TOC" href="#viii_3-p1.2">1</a></li>
 <li>sicut praedicavi: 
  <a class="TOC" href="#iv.iv.iv-p2.10">1</a></li>
 <li>sicut praedixi: 
  <a class="TOC" href="#iv.iv.iv-p2.9">1</a>
  <a class="TOC" href="#iv.iv.iv-p2.11">2</a></li>
</ul>
</div>



</div2>
</div1>








</ThML.body>
</ThML>
